Alvarion Technologies IF-57 IP Broadband Wireless Access System User Manual SystemManual
Alvarion Ltd. IP Broadband Wireless Access System SystemManual
User Manual
BreezeACCESS V
System Manual
Cat. No. 213283
© 2002 by Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form without the written permission of
the copyright owner.
Trade Names
BreezeACCESS, BreezeNET, BreezeLINK, BreezeVIEW, BreezeMANAGE, BreezeCONFIG and
BreezeWIZARD are trade names of Alvarion Ltd. Other brand and product names are registered
trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Alvarion shall not be
liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranty
In the following warranty text, “the Company” shall mean:
Alvarion Ltd., for products located outside the USA.
Alvarion Inc., for products located in the USA.
This BreezeACCESS product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period
of one year from date of purchase. During this warranty period the Company will, at its option, either
repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, the product must be returned to a service facility designated by the
Company. Authorization to return products must be obtained prior to shipment. The buyer shall pay
all shipping charges to the Company and the Company shall pay shipping charges to return the
product to the buyer.
The Company warrants that the firmware designed by it for use with the unit will execute its
programming instructions when properly installed on the unit. The Company does not warrant that the
operation of the unit or firmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Limitations of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance
by the buyer, buyer supplied interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of
the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance. No
other warranty is expressed or implied. The Company specifically disclaims the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose.
Alvarion shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not
limited to, loss of profits or revenues, loss of use or damage to any associated equipment, cost of
capital, cost of substitute products, facilities or services, downtime costs or claims resulting from any
cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture, sale, handling, service,
repair, maintenance or use of the products. In no event shall the company’s liability exceed the
purchase price denoted on the invoice.
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Electronic Emission Notice
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment
notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
FCC Radiation Hazard Warning
To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in section 1.1307, a minimum separation distance of
2 m (79 inches) is required between the antenna and all persons:
Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Safety Considerations
For the following safety considerations, “Instrument” means the BreezeACCESS units’ components
and their cables.
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
BS-GU Lithium Battery
Caution: Danger of battery explosion if incorrectly replaced or disposed of. Replace only with the
same or equivilant type battery, as recommended by the manufactuer. Dispose of used batterys
according to manufactuer’s instructions.
Line Voltage
Before connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of the power source
matches the requirements of the instrument.
Power Cord
Use only the power cord supplied with the unit.
Radio
The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid possible harmful exposure
to this energy, do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term
characteristics or the possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have
not been yet fully investigated.
Important Notice iii
Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding
Be sure that the outdoor unit, the antenna and the supporting structure are properly installed to
eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Verify that the outdoor unit and the
antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded so as to provide protection against voltage
surges and static charges. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is
performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes.
iv BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Important Notice
This user's manual is applicable to BreezeACCESS units using software
version 4.1 or later and is delivered subject to the following conditions
and restrictions:
!This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion
Ltd. Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting
explicitly and properly authorized users of BreezeACCESS.
!No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed
to any person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and
mechanical, without the express prior written permission of
Alvarion Ltd.
!The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and
reference only. The specifications on which they are based are
subject to change without notice.
!The software described in this document is furnished under a
license. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with
the terms of that agreement.
!Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
!Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein
are fictitious unless otherwise noted.
!Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications
and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of
this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or
warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such
contract or warranty.
!The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature,
and does not constitute a binding offer for the sale of the product
described herein.
NOTE:
The currently released BreezeACCESS V product line does not include certain products
and features which are described in this manual. These include the following:
! SU-E Subscriber units with a connector for an external antenna
! Subscriber Units with voice support
! BreezeCONFIG
! BreezeMANAGE
Table of Contents
System Manual Book 1:
System Description
Introduction .............................................................1-1
Introducing BreezeACCESS .....................................................1-2
System
Components .............................................................2-1
Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment) ...............2-2
Base Station Equipment ...........................................................2-4
Networking Equipment ..............................................................2-8
Management Systems ...............................................................2-9
Specifications ..........................................................3-1
System Specifications ...............................................................3-2
Physical Specifications .............................................................3-6
System Manual Book 2:
Installation
IF-Based
Equipment ................................................................1-1
Packing Lists ..............................................................................1-2
Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations ..................1-5
Installing the Outdoor Unit .......................................................1-7
Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Unit ...........................1-12
Installing Modular Base Station Equipment ..........................1-14
Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System .................1-20
System Manual Book 3:
Commissioning
Setting
Basic Parameters ....................................................1-1
Accessing the Monitor Program ..............................................1-2
Configuring Basic Parameters in
Access and Subscriber Units ...................................................1-5
Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS Units ...........................1-10
Optimizing
the Wireless Link .....................................................2-1
RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration
(Subscriber Units) ......................................................................2-2
Aligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit .............2-3
Connecting
External Alarm
Devices ....................................................................3-1
Connecting External Devices to the
GU-BS AL IN and/or AL OUT Connectors ...............................3-2
Verifying
Proper Operation .....................................................4-1
Verifying Connectivity ...............................................................4-2
LED Indicators ...........................................................................4-4
System Manual Book 4:
Operations and Administration
Accessing the
Monitor Program ......................................................1-1
Accessing the Monitor Program using the
RS 232 MON Connector ............................................................1-2
Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet ........................1-4
Operating the Monitor Program ...............................................1-6
Menus
and Parameters .......................................................2-1
Main Menu ..................................................................................2-2
Info Screens Menu .....................................................................2-3
Unit Control Menu ......................................................................2-6
Basic Configuration Menu ......................................................2-10
Site Survey Menu .....................................................................2-12
Advanced Configuration Menu ...............................................2-21
Configuration
Download/Upload .....................................................3-1
Table of Contents ix
System Manual:
Appendices
Appendix A:
Software Version
Loading Procedure ..................................................A-1
General ...................................................................................... A-1
Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type: F .............. A-3
Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type: S .............. A-5
Appendix B:
Supported MIBs
and Traps .................................................................B-1
BreezeACCESS System Object Identifiers ............................. B-2
brzAccessMIB ........................................................................... B-4
brzPhoneMIB (applicable to SU with voice only) ................ B-33
Supported Traps ..................................................................... B-39
Appendix C:
RSSI to dBm
Conversion Table .....................................................C-1
Appendix D:
Parameters List .......................................................D-1
Unit Control Parameters .......................................................... D-1
Site Survey Parameters ........................................................... D-2
IP Parameters ........................................................................... D-2
Air Interface Parameters .......................................................... D-3
Network Management Parameters .......................................... D-5
Bridge Parameters ................................................................... D-6
Performance Parameters ......................................................... D-7
Service Parameters .................................................................. D-8
Security Parameters ................................................................. D-8
Voice Parameters ..................................................................... D-9
Dialing Parameters ................................................................. D-10
Telephony Signals .................................................................. D-12
Hopping Parameters .............................................................. D-14
Index .........................................................................I-1
xBreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
BreezeACCESS V
System Manual Book 1:
System Description
System Description
Table of Contents
Introduction .............................................................1-1
Introducing BreezeACCESS .....................................................1-2
System
Components .............................................................2-1
Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment) ...............2-2
SU-A/E Units with an Outdoor Radio Unit and Antenna .....2-2
Base Station Equipment ...........................................................2-4
Modular Base Station Equipment .......................................2-4
AU-E-NI Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access Unit ...................2-7
Networking Equipment ..............................................................2-8
Management Systems ...............................................................2-9
BreezeMANAGE ................................................................2-9
BreezeCONFIG ................................................................2-10
Specifications ..........................................................3-1
System Specifications ...............................................................3-2
Radio and Modem ..............................................................3-2
Data Communication ..........................................................3-3
Voice/Fax (Subscriber Units with voice support) ................3-3
Telephony (Subscriber Units with voice support) ...............3-3
IF Indoor – Outdoor Communication
(SU-A/E, AU-E-NI, AU-E-BS) .............................................3-4
Configuration and Management .........................................3-4
GU-RA GPS Radio .............................................................3-4
GU-RA to BS-GU Communication .....................................3-5
Environmental ....................................................................3-5
Standards Compliance, General ........................................3-5
Physical Specifications .............................................................3-6
SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ......................................................3-6
AU-E-NI Stand-Alone Access Unit .....................................3-7
Modular Base Station Equipment .......................................3-8
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter introduces the BreezeACCESS system, its components and
its functions.
About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Introducing BreezeACCESS
BreezeACCESS IP Broadband Wireless Access system is an IP based
access system that supports wireless data and voice services, employing
wireless packet-switched data technology to support high-speed IP
services, including fast access to the Internet and Virtual Private
Networks.
BreezeACCESS users are provided with a network connection that is
always on, supporting access to the Internet and other IP services at
data rates of up to 3 Mbps. BreezeACCESS can also support high
quality telephony using the ITU-T H.323 industry standard for Voice
over IP communications. The system is designed for cellular-like
deployment, allowing systems of various sizes and structures to be
constructed. A system may include any number of cells, each
containing several Access Units, to better cover densely populated
areas.
The BreezeACCESS system allows the Maximum (data burst)
Information Rate (MIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR) for both
uplink and downlink to be defined separately for each subscriber. This
enables a variety of Class of Service (CoS) packages, bandwidth
allocations and traffic-shaping schemes. In addition, the system
supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802.1Q, enabling secure
operation and Virtual Private Network (VPN) services as well as allowing
tele-workers or remote offices to conveniently access their enterprise
networks. The system also supports Layer 2 traffic prioritization
according to IEEE 802.1p and ToS based Layer 3 traffic prioritization
according to RFC791.
BreezeACCESS V operates in the 5.7 GHz ISM band in Time Division
Duplex (TDD) mode. It employs wireless packet data switching
technology, utilizing Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FH-SS)
radios.
BreezeACCESS V units are available with one of the following options:
!US Option – Supports the standard ISM Frequency Hopping
sequence.
!INT (International) Option – Allows hopping frequency selection.
A BreezeACCESS-based system consists of the following:
!Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) – BreezeACCESS Subscriber
Units.
!Base Station Equipment (BSE) – BreezeACCESS Access Units and
supporting equipment.
!Networking Equipment – Standard Routers and/or
Gateways/Gatekeepers supporting connections to the Internet
and/or the PSTN or private telephony network.
!Management Systems – SNMP based Management, Billing and
Customer Care, and other Operations Support Systems.
Chapter 2
System
Components
This chapter describes the BreezeACCESS system components. It
includes the following sections:
! Subscriber Units (Customer Premises Equipment)‚ page 2-2,
describes BreezeACCESS equipment installed at the customer’s
premises.
!Base Station Equipment‚ page 2-4, describes the equipment used
in BreezeACCESS Base Stations.
!Networking Equipment‚ page 2-8, describes how BreezeACCESS
Base Station units are connected to one another and to other
equipment in a network environment.
! Management Systems‚ page 2-9, introduces the management
features built into the BreezeACCESS system and describes the use
of various standard and proprietary management systems.
About This Chapter
2-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Subscriber Units (Customer
Premises Equipment)
The BreezeACCESS Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at the customer
premises provides data only or data and telephone connections. The
data connection is a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45)
interface while the voice connection (in units that support voice) is a
standard RJ 11 Plain Old Telephone (POTS) interface.
The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient platform for high rate Internet
and Intranet services, providing subscribers with fast access to IP based
services at a burst data rate of up to 3 Mbps. The use of packet
switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network
that is practically always on, allowing for immediate access to services.
SU-A/E Units with an Outdoor Radio
Unit and Antenna
SU-A and SU-E series Subscriber Units are comprised of an indoor unit
(SU-NI) and an outdoor unit.
!In the SU-A series, the outdoor unit (SU-RA) contains the radio
module and an integral flat antenna.
!In the SU-E series, the outdoor unit (SU-RE) contains the radio
module and an RF connector for an external antenna.
The indoor SU-NI unit connects to the user’s equipment and is powered
from the mains via its SU-PS power supply unit. The SU-NI is connected
to the outdoor unit via a 50-ohm coaxial Intermediate Frequency (IF)
cable. This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals between the indoor and the
outdoor units and also serves for transferring power (12 VDC),
management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor
unit.
NOTE:
The currently released BreezeACCESS V product line does not support SU-E units or
units with voice support.
System Components 2-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Figure 2-1: BreezeACCESS SU-A/E Outdoor and Indoor Units
The following products are available:
Data-only Units:
Data and Voice Units:
X=A: The outdoor radio unit includes an integral high gain flat antenna
X=E: The outdoor radio unit has a connector for an external antenna
SU-X-1D-5.7 The unit supports one Ethernet device.
SU-X-8D-5.7 The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices
(eight MAC addresses).
SU-X-BD-5.7 The unit provides bridge functionality and can
support up to a full LAN.
SU-X-1D1V-5.7 The unit supports one Ethernet device and has
an interface to a standard analog telephone set
(POTS).
SU-X-8D1V-5.7 The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices
(eight MAC addresses) and has an interface to
a standard analog telephone set (POTS).
SU-X-BD1V-5.7 The unit provides bridge functionality and
can support a full LAN. It also has an
interface for a standard analog telephone
(POTS).
2-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Base Station Equipment
The BreezeACCESS Access Units (AU) installed at the base station site
provide all the functionality necessary to communicate with the remote
Subscriber Units as well as to connect to the backbone of the service
provider. Each AU connects to the network through a standard IEEE
802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interface.
There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures:
!Modular Base Station Equipment
!Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access Unit
Modular Base Station Equipment
The Base Station equipment is based on the BS-SH 3U chassis, which is
suitable for installation in 19” racks. The chassis contains one or two
power supply modules, up to six active Access Unit Network Interface
(BS-AU) modules and an optional BS-GU GPS and Alarms module.
Two different types of power supply modules are available: the BS-PS
which is powered from a –48 VDC power source, and the BS-PS-AC,
powered from the 110/230 VAC mains. The optional use of two power
supply modules is for fail-safe operation through power supply
redundancy.
Each BS-AU module, together with its outdoor radio unit comprises an
AU-E-BS Access Unit that serves a single sector. The AU-RE outdoor
unit contains the radio module and a RF connector for a separate
external antenna.The BS-AU modules connect to the network through
standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interfaces. A coaxial
Intermediate Frequency (IF) cable connects the indoor module to the
outdoor unit. This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals, power (12 VDC)
and management and control signals from the indoor unit to the
outdoor unit.
System Components 2-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Figure 2-2: BreezeACCESS Base Station Module and Outdoor Unit
GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System
The optional GU-A-BS system can be used to synchronize the frequency
hopping mechanisms of collocated AU-E-BS BreezeACCESS units
(where such synchronization is permitted by local regulations) as well as
to provide alarm management.
The GU-A-BS system is comprised of two units:
!An outdoor GPS Receiver and Antenna unit, the GU-RA.
!An indoor GPS and Alarms module, the BS-GU.
2-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Figure 2-3: BreezeACCESS GU-A-BS System Components
The BreezeACCESS BS-GU module is designed to be inserted into the
BS-SH 19” base station chassis to provide hopping synchronization
signals to the BS-AU Access Unit modules. The card uses timing signals
derived from signals received from the GU-RA GPS antenna. These
signals, generated by the GPS global satellites network, allow accurate
synchronization of systems located in different locations. Any number of
base stations can be synchronized, guaranteeing that all AUs (Access
Units) hop in unison from frequency to frequency. In addition, the GPS
signal insures that all units begin their pre-defined hopping sequence at
the same time.
The BS-GU module is connected to the GU-RA GPS antenna via a cable
that carries power from the module to the antenna, timing signals from
the antenna to the module and management signals between the two
units.
The BS-GU also provides synchronization signals to other BS-GU
modules by daisy-chaining any number of modules, allowing a single
GU-RA GPS antenna to synchronize multiple AUs in several collocated
BS-SH chassis.
When a GU-RA GPS antenna is not connected to the module (or if the
connected GPS antenna is not functioning properly), the BS-GU module
provides self-generated synchronization signals to all AUs.
System Components 2-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Daisy-chained BS-GU modules use the synchronization signals
generated by the first unit in the chain (the Master unit).
The BS-GU module also supports the management of alarm inputs and
outputs. The module receives Alarms In indications from other
BreezeACCESS modules in the base station shelf (internal alarms) and
external alarms from other devices via the AL IN connector. Alarms Out
management allows activation of external devices upon occurrence of
user-defined events, using relays via the AL OUT connector.
AU-E-NI Standalone “Micro-Cell”
Access Unit
The AU-E-NI is a Standalone Access Unit that is very similar to the
AU-E-BS unit, the only difference being that the indoor unit, the AU-NI,
is a Standalone desktop or wall-mountable unit rather than a 19”
module.
Figure 2-4: BreezeACCESS AU-NI Unit
The AU-RE outdoor unit is identical to that of the AU-E-BS line. The
AU-NI indoor unit is powered from the mains (100-250 VAC) through an
external power transformer and connects to the network through a
standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10BaseT (RJ 45) interface. A coaxial
Intermediate Frequency (IF) cable connects between the AU-NI indoor
unit and the outdoor unit. This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals, power
(12 VDC) and management and control signals from the indoor unit to
the outdoor unit.
2-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Networking Equipment
The base station equipment is connected to the backbone through
standard data communication and telecommunication equipment. For
improved security, the 10BaseT ports of the AU modules are connected
directly to a multi-port router. This router is connected by any means of
point-to-point link to the backbone. In cases where security is less
important and cost is the main concern, the Access Units can be
connected to an Ethernet switch and then to a single port router.
The point-to-point link from the base station to the backbone may be
wired or wireless links. The data to the Internet is routed to the Internet
backbone through standard routers. The voice traffic is routed via
standard Gateways/Gatekeepers to the PSTN.
System Components 2-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Management Systems
The end-to-end IP based architecture of the system allows full
management of all components from any point in the system.
BreezeACCESS components can be managed using standard
management tools through SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) agents that implement standard and proprietary MIBs for
remote setting of operational modes and parameters. The same SNMP
management tools can also be used for management of other system
components including Switches, Routers, Gateways/Gatekeepers and
transmission equipment.
The Ethernet WAN can also be used to connect to other Operation
Support Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA
(Authentication, Authorization and Admission) tools.
BreezeMANAGE
Alvarion’s SNMP-based BreezeMANAGE network management
application provides a powerful tool for configuring, controlling,
monitoring and effectively managing BreezeACCESS networks from a
single, central network management station. BreezeMANAGE, together
with the powerful tools available through its use under leading network
management platforms, provides numerous benefits to operators of
BreezeACCESS networks.
BreezeMANAGE system requirements are:
!BreezeMANAGE for SNMPc: Castle Rock Computing SNMPc
version 5.0.7d or higher (excluding 5.0.8), running under Windows
98/2000/NT.
!BreezeMANAGE for HP-OV under UNIX: HP OpenView version
5.0.1 or higher running on a UNIX machine under Solaris Version
2.5 or higher.
!BreezeMANAGE for HP-OV under NT: HP OpenView version 5.0.1
or higher running on a PC under Windows NT version 4.0 or higher
with service pack 5.
!Client: Any system supported by the network management platform
such as HP-UX Xterm (HP-OV) or Windows 95/98/2000/NT.
!Database: Any database supported by the network management
platform such as Oracle, Sybase, Informix or Ingress.
NOTE:
The currently released version of BreezeMANAGE (SW version 4.0.6) does not support
BreezeACCESS V units.
2-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
BreezeCONFIG
The BreezeCONFIG ACCESS configuration utility can also be used to
manage BreezeACCESS system components. It is an SNMP-based
application that provides a consistent view of the network and
the system administrator can use it to control a large number of units
from a single location.
BreezeCONFIG has the following system requirements:
!Windows 95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP
!128 MB RAM recommended, 64 MB Minimum
Some of the features BreezeCONFIG supports are:
!Verifying units’ status and current configuration
!Changing the configuration of a selected unit
!Simultaneously changing the configuration of multiple units
!Viewing traffic statistics and performance data
!Monitoring traps
!Performing firmware upgrade to a single or multiple units
NOTES:
The BreezeCONFIG utility can be downloaded from the Alvarion Web site:
www.alvarion.com.
The currently released version of BreezeCONFIG (SW version 4.0.50) does not support
BreezeACCESS V units.
Chapter 3
Specifications
This chapter lists the technical specifications of BreezeACCESS and
includes the following sections:
!System Specifications‚ page 3-2, outlines the technical
specifications of the BreezeACCESS system.
!Physical Specifications‚ page 3-6, lists the physical and electical
specifications for different types of BreezeACCESS units.
About This Chapter
3-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
System Specifications
Radio and Modem
Frequency INT Mode: 5.725-5.875 GHz
US Mode: 5.725-5.710 GHz
Operation Mode Time Division Duplex
Radio Access Method FH-CDMA
Standard Compliance FCC Part 15.247, ETS 301 253
Channel Bandwidth 1 MHz
Central Frequency
Resolution 1 MHz
Antenna SU-RA 20dBi, 14o horizontal x 11 o vertical, vertical
polarization, EN 302 085, Class TS 2 compliant
SU-RE, AU-RE N-Type connector, 50 ohm
The tested antenna types are as follows:
Sector Antenna:
17 dBi, 60o Horizontal x 7o Vertical, vertical
polarization, EN 302 085
Subscriber Antenna:
20 dBi, 14o Horizontal x 11o Vertical, vertical
polarization, EN 302 085 Class TS2 Compliant
Output Power
(at antenna port) 26 dBm typical
Maximum Input Power
(at antenna port) -20 dBm
Gross Bit Rate 1, 2, 3 Mbps
Receive Nominal Sensitivity
(at antenna port,
BER 10E-6)
1 Mbps 2 Mbps 3 Mbps
-85 dBm -78 dBm -70 dBm
Modulation GFSK modulation, with 2, 4, 8 modulation states (1, 2, 3 bits / symbol).
Symbol rate 1 Msymbol/sec.
Specifications 3-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Data Communication
Voice/Fax (Subscriber Units with
voice support)
Telephony (Subscriber Units with
voice support)
Standard Compliance IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
VLAN support Based on IEEE 802.1Q
Layer-2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802.1p
Layer-3 Traffic Prioritization ToS according to RFC791
MIR (Maximum Information Rate)
and CIR (Committed Information
Rate)
Programmable for each user, separately for uplink and
downlink. Range: 0 – 2200 Kbps, 1 Kbps resolution.
Standard Compliance ITU-T H.323 Ver. 2 VoIP standard
Compression G.711 (A-Law and µ-Law) - 64 Kbps (transparent)
G.723.1 - 6.3 Kbps
G.729 - 8 Kbps (G.729, G.729 with Annex A and/or Annex B)
Silence Compression G.723.1 - Voice Activity Detection (VAD), G.729 - Annex B
Echo Cancellation ITU-T G.168 and G.131
Fax Transmission According to T.38 Protocol
Call Progress Tones Selectable per country standard or user definable
Line Type Loop Start
On-hook Voltage -48 V
Ringer Voltage Min. 50 V r.m.s. unbalanced
Ringer Frequency Selectable: 17, 20, 25, 50 Hz
REN Max. 2
Off-hook DC current 30mA
Off-hook impedance 600 ohm or complex
Maximum input level +3 dBm
Cable length Max. 300 m, 26 AWG
3-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
IF Indoor – Outdoor Communication
(SU-A/E, AU-E-NI, AU-E-BS)
Configuration and Management
GU-RA GPS Radio
IF Frequency 440 MHz
IF Cable Impedance 50 ohm
Maximum IF Cable Attenuation 15 dB
Maximum IF Cable DC Resistance 1.5 ohm
Management Options a. Via the MON port, using terminal emulation with the built-in monitor
program
b. Telnet, using the monitor program
c. TFTP, using the Configuration upload/download utility
d. SNMP
Remote Management Access From Wired LAN, Wireless Link
Management Access
Protection a. Multilevel password
b. Configuration of remote access direction (from Ethernet only, from
wireless link only or from both sides)
c. Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations
SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client.
MIB II, Bridge MIB, Private BreezeACCESS MIB
Security a. Association protocol – ESSID
b. RC4 WEP option (encryption of the authentication process)
c. VLAN according to IEEE 802.1Q
d. IP level filtering for user addresses or protocols
e. Access direction and IP address filtering for management
Allocation of IP Parameters Configurable or automatic (DHCP client)
Software Upgrade Via TFTP
General L1 frequency, C/A code (SPS) continuous tracking receiver
Update Rate 1 Hz
Specifications 3-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
GU-RA to BS-GU Communication
Environmental
Standards Compliance, General
Physical interface RS 422
Cable Type EIA RS 422 3 x 2 x 26AWG + 1 x 2 x 24 AWG FTP Shielded.
3 x 26 AWG twisted pairs for RS 422 communication and 1x 24 AWG pair
for power supply
Cable Impedance 100 +/- 15 ohm @ 1 MHz (RS 422 pairs)
DC Resistance RS 422 pairs: 145 ohm/km
Power supply pair: 94 ohm/km
Maximum Cable Length 120 meters
Operating
Temperature Outdoor Units -400C to 550C (GU-RA: -400C to 850C)
Indoor equipment 00C to 400C
Operating Humidity Outdoor Units 5%-95% non-condensing, weather protected
Indoor equipment 5%-95% non-condensing
Type Standard
EMC FCC part 15 EN 300 385
Safety UL 1950, EN 60950
Environmental ETS 300 019 part 2-3 class 3.2E for indoor units
ETS 300 019 part 2-4 class 4.1E for outdoor units
Radio FCC part 15.247, ETSI ETS 301 253
3-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Physical Specifications
SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
Connectors
Electrical
Mechanical
Unit Connector Description
SU-NI IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
ETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDs.
Cable connection to a PC: straight
TEL (units with
voice support) RJ 11 jack (POTS)
DC-12 V DC phone jack for the SU-PS power supply
MON RS 232, 3-pin low profile jack
SU-RE IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
SU-RA IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
Unit Details
General Power consumption: 25 W
SU-NI External power supply
AC input power: 100-240 Vr.m.s., 47-63 Hz
DC power output: 12 V, 2.5 A
SU-RA, SU-RE 12 VDC from the SU-NI unit over the IF cable
Unit Structure Dimensions Weight
General An indoor SU-NI unit with an external SU-PS power
supply unit and an outdoor SU-RE or SU-RA radio unit
SU-NI Metal box, desktop or wall mountable 15 x 8.7 x 3.7 cm 0.34 kg.
SU-PS Desktop unit, 1.5 m DC cable 12 x 6 x 3.6 cm 0.28 kg.
SU-RE Metal box, pole or wall mountable 30.8 x 12 x 4.7 cm 1.58 kg.
SU-RA Metal box plus an integral antenna in plastic enclosure,
pole or wall mountable
30.6 x 30.6 x 7.2 cm
(30.6 x 12 x 4.7 cm
+ 30.6 x 30.6 x 2.5
cm)
2.5 kg.
Specifications 3-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
AU-E-NI Stand-Alone Access Unit
Connectors
Electrical
Mechanical
Unit Connector Description
AU-NI IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
ETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDs
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
DC-12 V DC phone jack for the AU-PS power supply
MON RS 232, 3-pin low profile jack
AU-RE IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
Unit Details
General Power consumption: 25 W
AU-NI External power supply
AC input power: 100-240 Vr.m.s., 47-63 Hz
DC power output: 12 V, 2.5 A
AU-RE 12 VDC from the AU-NI unit over the IF cable
Unit Structure Dimensions Weight
General An indoor AU-NI unit with an external AU-PS power
supply unit and an outdoor AU-RE or AU-RA radio
unit
AU-NI Metal box, desktop or wall mountable 15 x 8.7 x 3.7 cm 0.34 kg
AU-PS Desktop unit, 1.5 m DC cable 12 x 6 x 3.6 cm 0.28 kg
AU-RE Metal box, poll or wall mountable 30.6 x 12 x 4.7 cm 1.58 kg
3-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
Modular Base Station Equipment
Connectors
Unit Connector Description
AU-E-BS AU-BS IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
ETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDs
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
MON RS 232, 3-pin low profile jack
AU-RE IF TNC jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
BS-PS -48V 3 pin DC power plug
BS-PS-AC AC IN 3 pin AC power plug
BS-GU ETH 10BaseT Ethernet (RJ 45) with 2 embedded LEDs
Cable connection to a PC: straight
SYNC IN 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003
(mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar);
4 contact closure alarm indicators
SYNC OUT 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003
(mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar);
3 non-latching relays, rating = 24 V (DC or AC) @ 1 A
max.
AL IN 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003
(mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar)
AL OUT 9-pin Micro D-Type jack, Molex 83619-9003
(mates with Molex 83421-9014 or similar)
GU-RA 12-pin round
Specifications 3-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Modular Base Station Equipment - Electrical
Mechanical
Unit Details
General 250 W for a fully equipped chassis (1 PS, 6 AU, 1 GU)
BS-PS DC power input: -48 V, 5.2 A max.
DC power output: 12 V; 5 V
BS-PS-AC AC power input: 85-256 VAC, 47-65 Hz,
DC power output: 12 V; 5 V; 3.3 V (not used)
BS-AU 5 VDC, 12 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back plane
AU-RE 12 VDC from the BS-AU over the IF cable
AU-BS (BS-AU
module plus AU-RE
outdoor unit)
Power consumption: 25 W
BS-GU 5 VDC, 12 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back plane
GU-RA 12 VDC from the BS-GU over the connecting cable
Unit Structure Dimensions Weight
BS-SH 19” rack (3U) or desktop installation 13 x 48.2 x 25.6 cm 4.76 kg
BS-PS DC power supply module 12.9 x 7 x 25.3 cm 0.7 kg
BS-PS-AC AC power supply module 12.9 x 7 x 25.3 cm 1.2 kg
BS-AU Indoor module of the AU-BS access unit 12.9 x 3.5 x 25.5 cm 0.22 kg
AU-RE Metal box, pole or wall mountable 30.6 x 12 x 4.7 cm 1.58 kg
BS-GU Indoor module of the GU-A-BS 12.9 x 3.5 x 23 cm 0.22 kg
GU-RA A plastic tubular enclosure, pole mountable 15.5 x 12.7 cm 0.363 kg
3-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Description
Manual Revision: 1.01
BreezeACCESS V
System Manual Book 2:
Installation
Installation
Table of Contents
IF-Based
Equipment ................................................................1-1
Packing Lists ..............................................................................1-2
SU-A/E Subscriber Unit ......................................................1-2
Modular Base Station Equipment .......................................1-2
Standalone AU-E-NI Access Unit .......................................1-3
Other Items Required for Installation ..................................1-3
Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations ..................1-5
AU-RE ................................................................................1-5
SU-RA and SU-RE .............................................................1-5
IF Cable ..............................................................................1-5
Indoor Equipment ...............................................................1-6
Installing the Outdoor Unit .......................................................1-7
The Outdoor Unit Bottom Panel .........................................1-7
Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit .........................................1-9
Connecting the Antenna Cable (SU-RE and AU-RE) .......1-11
Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Unit ...........................1-12
Installing the SU-NI/AU-NI Unit ........................................1-13
Installing Modular Base Station Equipment ..........................1-14
BS-SH Slot Assignments ..................................................1-14
The BS-PS .......................................................................1-14
The BS-PS-AC .................................................................1-15
The BS-AU .......................................................................1-17
BS-SH Chassis and Modules Installation Procedure .......1-18
Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System .................1-20
BS-GU Front Panel ..........................................................1-20
Installing the GU-RA GPS Antenna ..................................1-22
Installing the BS-GU module ............................................1-23
Daisy-chaining Two or More BS-GU Modules ..................1-23
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Chapter 1
IF-Based
Equipment
This chapter describes the basic installation of BreezeACCESS IF-based
equipment, including SU-A/E subscriber units, modular base station
equipment and stand-alone AU-E-NI access units. It includes the
following sections:
!Packing Lists‚ page 1-2, lists the equipment that is packed with
each BreezeACCESS IF-based unit.
!Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations‚ page 1-5, gives
tips and guidence for locating BreezeACCESS equipment for
optimum performance.
!Installing the Outdoor Unit‚ page 1-7, explains how to install the
outdoor elements of BreezeACCESS systems.
!Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Unit‚ page 1-12, outlines
the installation procedures for SU-NI and AU-NI units.
!Installing Modular Base Station Equipment‚ page 1-14, outlines
the installation procedures for modular base station equipment.
!Installing the GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System‚ page 1-20,
outlines the installation procedures for a GPS and Alarms system.
About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Packing Lists
SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
!SU-NI Indoor unit
!Outdoor unit:
SU-RA with integral antenna
–Or–
SU-RE with a connector to an external antenna (not included)
!SU-PS power supply with a mains power cord
!Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit
!Wall mounting kit for the SU-NI unit
Modular Base Station Equipment
BS-SH Base Station Chassis
!BS-SH chassis (with blank panels)
!Rubber legs for optional desktop installation
!BS-PS DC power supply
!DC power cable
!Documentation CD
BS-SH-AC Base Station Chassis
!BS-SH-AC Chassis (with blank panels)
!Rubber legs for optional desktop installation
!BS-PS-AC AC Power Supply
!AC Power Cable
!Documentation CD
AU-E-BS Access Units (up to six per chassis)
! AU-RE with a connector to an external antenna (not included)
!Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit
!BS-AU Network Interface module
!Monitor cable
BS-PS DC Power Supply (one or two per
chassis)
!BS-PS power supply module
!DC power cable
IF Based Equipment 1-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
BS-PS-AC Power Supply (one or two per
chassis)
!BS-PS-AC power supply module
!AC power cable
GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System
!BS-GU module
!GU-RA GPS antenna and receiver
!1” threaded mounting pole for the GU-RA GPS antenna
!Antenna Mounting kit
Standalone AU-E-NI Access Unit
! AU-RE with a connector to an external antenna (not included)
!Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit
!AU-NI indoor unit
!Wall mounting kit for the AU-NI unit
!AU-PS power supply with a mains power cord
!Monitor cable
!Documentation CD
Other Items Required for
Installation
!IF cable* (available from Alvarion in different lengths)
!Grounding cable with an appropriate termination
!Antenna* and RF cable* according to specific installation conditions
for units with external separate antennas
!Ethernet cable to connect the equipment to the Ethernet outlet (see
Table 1-1‚ page 1-4)
!Telephone cord for connecting a Subscriber Unit with voice support
to a telephone set (RJ 11 connector at the Subscriber Unit side)
!GPS cable (30, 60 or 120 meter – supplied separately according to
order)*
!SYNC cable* – for daisy-chaining GPS modules (if necessary)
!Alarms-In and Alarms-Out cables* for the GPS module (if necessary)
!Installation tools and materials
For local configuration of parameters:
!A portable PC with Terminal Emulation software and Monitor cable*
(Monitor cable is supplied with Access Units)
–Or–
!A portable PC equipped with an Ethernet card and with Telnet
software, and an Ethernet cable (see Table 1-1‚ page 1-4)
1-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available as options from Alvarion.
NOTE:
The BS-GU does not have an external Monitor port and it should be configured via the
Ethernet port using Telnet.
Table 1-1: Required type of Ethernet cable
Unit Type Connection to a
PC Connection to a
hub
Subscriber Unit Straight Crossed
Access Units Crossed Straight
GPS module Straight Crossed
IF Based Equipment 1-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Guidelines for Selection of
Equipment Locations
Select appropriate locations for the outdoor unit and for the indoor
equipment using the following guidelines:
!The outdoor unit can be pole or wall mounted. Its location should
allow easy access to the unit for installation and testing.
!The higher the antenna, the better the achievable link quality.
Units with an external antenna should be installed as near as possible
to the antenna.
AU-RE
The external antenna connected to the AU-RE unit, should be installed
where it provides coverage of all Subscriber Terminals in the area it is
intended to serve. The higher the antenna, the better coverage it can
provide.
SU-RA and SU-RE
The SU-RA outdoor unit with its integrated antenna, or the external
antenna connected to the SU-RE unit, should be installed where it has
a direct line of sight with the Base Station antenna.
The antenna (integrated on the front side of the SU-RA outdoor unit or
external if using SU-RE) should be directed towards the Base Station.
The unit should be installed in a way that allows optimal alignment
towards the Base Station.
IF Cable
The outdoor unit is connected to the indoor unit by means of an IF cable
carrying signaling, control signals and power. The IF frequency is
NOTE:
Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation
professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever
applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities.
Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS product warranty and may expose the
end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers
or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with
the installation of outdoor units or antennas.
NOTE:
The distance between any two antennas should be greater than 40 cm.
1-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
440 MHz. The maximum allowed attenuation of the IF cable connecting
the outdoor unit to the indoor unit is 15 dB at 440 MHz, and the
maximum allowed DC resistance (the sum of the DC resistance of the
inner and outer conductors) is 1.5 ohm. This allows for cable length of
up to 30 m when using the standard RG 58 cable.
If longer cables are required, a cable with lower attenuation and/or DC
resistance should be used. Table 1-2‚ page 1-6 provides details
regarding some popular cables such as the RG 58 and RG 213. If the
spectral environment is polluted with noise in the 440 MHz band, it is
recommended to use a higher quality double-shielded cable such as the
LMR 200, LMR 240 and LMR 400 (manufactured by Times
Communications).
Indoor Equipment
The Indoor unit should be installed as close as possible to the point
where the IF cable enters the building. The location of the indoor unit
should also take into account the need to connect it to a power mains
outlet and to the CPE.
Table 1-2: IF Cables
Cable Type RG 58 RG 213 LMR 200 LMR 240 LMR 400
Maximum cable length (m) 30 100 45 65 150
NOTE:
The system complies with the ETS 300 385 standard and is protected against secondary
lightning strikes when its outdoor unit is properly grounded according to the applicable
country-specific industry standards for protection of structures against lightning. The
system complies with EN 61000-4-5, test level 3 (2kV).
IF Based Equipment 1-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Installing the Outdoor Unit
The Outdoor Unit Bottom Panel
The SU-RA outdoor unit includes the radio and an integral high-gain
flat antenna located on the front of the unit. The SU-RE and AU-RE
outdoor radio units have an RF connector for connection to an external
antenna.
Figure 1-1SU-RA/RE Bottom Panel
NOTE:
SU-RE and AU-RE units must be installed by a professional installer only.
Table 1-3: SU-RA/RE LEDs
Name Description Functionality
ETH Ethernet activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to
Ethernet LAN
Off – No activity on the Ethernet LAN
WLNK Wireless link
activity Blinking – Receiving packet from the wireless link
Off – No reception of packets from the wireless link
ALARM Alarm indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the
locking process of any of the synthesizers
Off – Normal operation
1-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Figure 1-2: AU-RE Bottom Panel
Table 1-4: SU-RA/RE Bar Display Description
LED Description Functionality
Yellow LED Power On – power is present
Off – power is not received from
the indoor unit
8 Green LEDs Received signal strength
indication Received RF signal level
indication in 4 dB resolution,
starting from –91 dBm
Red LED High RF signal level Received signal level is
–40 dBm or higher
IF Based Equipment 1-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 1-5: AU-RE LEDs
Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit
The outdoor unit can be secured to the pole using one of the following
options:
!Special brackets and open-ended screws (supplied with each unit).
There are two pairs of screw holes on the back of the unit, allowing
use of the special brackets with various pole widths.
!U-bolts – size A (inner installation holes, up to 2" pole).
!U-bolt – size B (outside installation holes, up to 3" pole).
!Metal bands (9/16" wide, minimum 12" long).
Figure 1-3‚ page 1-10 shows the locations of the U-bolt holes, band
grooves and screw holes on the rear side of the outdoor unit.
Figure 1-4‚ page 1-10 illustrates the method of installing an outdoor
unit on a pole, using the brackets and open-ended screws.
Name Description Functionality
ETH Ethernet activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to
Ethernet LAN
Off – No activity on the Ethernet LAN
12V IN Power On – 12 VDC power is supplied to the unit
Off – 12 VDC power is not available
ALARM Alarm indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the
locking process of any of the synthesizers
Off – Normal operation
NOTE:
Make sure to install the unit with the bottom panel (the panel with the IF connector)
facing downward.
1-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Figure 1-3: Holes/Grooves/Screw Holes
Figure 1-4: 3" Pole Mounting Installation Using the Special Brackets
NOTE:
When inserting the open-ended screws, make sure to insert them with the grooves
pointing outwards; these grooves are intended to allow fastening of the screws with a
screwdriver.
IF Based Equipment 1-11
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Connecting the Antenna Cable
(SU-RE and AU-RE)
Connect an RF cable between the ANT connector (located on the top
panel of the unit) and the antenna.
Connecting the Ground and IF Cables
The ground terminal (marked ) and the IF cable connector (marked IF)
are located on the bottom panel of the unit.
1. Connect one end of the ground cable to the ground terminal and
tighten the ground screw firmly. Connect the other end of the ground
cable to a protective ground connection.
2. Connect the coaxial cable to the IF connector. Verify that the length
of the IF cable is sufficient and that it can easily reach the indoor
unit.
NOTE:
Make sure to switch off the power at the indoor unit prior to connecting/disconnecting
the IF cable to/from the outdoor unit.
1-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Installing the SU-NI and AU-NI
Indoor Unit
Figure 1-5: SU-NI with Voice Support Rear Panel
Figure 1-6: SU-NI/AU-NI Front Panel
NOTE:
The rear panel pictured above in Figure 1-5 is a SU-NI with voice support; AU-NI units
and SU-NI units that belong to Subscriber Units without voice support are identical,
except that they have no TEL port.
IF Based Equipment 1-13
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The SU-NI/AU-NI provides the following interfaces:
!An Ethernet connector (marked ETH) for connecting the unit to the
network. See Table 1-1‚ page 1-4 for information on the required
type of Ethernet cable.
!An IF connector for connecting the unit to an outdoor unit.
!A DC-12V connector for the power supply.
!A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal
emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes.
!A TEL connector (Sunscriber Units with voice support only) for
connecting a regular telephone.
Installing the SU-NI/AU-NI Unit
1. Place the unit in an appropriate location on a shelf or a table. The
unit can be wall mounted using the installation materials provided
with the unit. Use a 6 mm (1/4") drill and the supplied template plate
for easy and accurate marking of the holes.
2. Connect the power supply DC power cord to the DC In jack (marked
DC-12V) located on the rear panel of the unit (shown in Figure 1-5‚
page 1-12).
3. Connect the IF cable to the IF connector (marked IF). The other side
of the IF cable should already be connected to the outdoor unit.
4. Connect the mains power cord to the power supply unit. Connect the
mains power plug to a mains power outlet.
5. Verify that the Power LED (marked PWR) located on the front panel
of the unit, as shown in Figure 1-6‚ page 1-12, is lit.
Table 1-6: SU-NI/AU-NI LEDs
Name Description Functionality
PWR Power Supply On – After successful power up, indicating
that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit.
Off – Power off or failure to supply 12 VDC
to the outdoor unit.
WLNK Wireless Link Activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the
wireless media
Off – No reception of packets from the
wireless media
1-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Installing Modular Base
Station Equipment
BS-SH Slot Assignments
The base station chassis has ten slots.
Figure 1-7: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignments
The two wide slots on both sides of the shelf accommodate the BS-PS or
BS-PS-AC power supply modules. The shelf is designed to support
power supply redundancy through the use of two power supply
modules. If a single power supply is used, it can be inserted in any of
the two available slots. When using two power supply modules, both
modules must be the same type (either both BS-PS or both BS-PS-AC).
The remaining eight slots can accommodate up to six active BS-AU
modules. Two extra slots are for an optional BS-GU GPS module and/or
for future use. Active BS-AU modules can be installed in any of the eight
slots. Unused slots should be covered by blank panels.
The BS-PS
The BS-PS provides power to all the modules installed in the BS-SH
chassis. The BS-PS front panel is shown in Figure 1-8‚ page 1-15.
IF Based Equipment 1-15
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Figure 1-8: BS-PS Front Panel
The BS-PS provides a power input connector (marked -48V) for
connecting the -48VDC power source to the module. The color codes of
the cable wires are:
Black -48 VDC
Red + (Return)
The power switch turns the mains power to the power supply ON and
OFF.
The BS-PS-AC
The BS-PS-AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. The BS-PS-AC front panel is
shown in Figure 1-9‚ page 1-16.
Table 1-7: BS-PS LEDs Functionality
Name Description
ON -48 VDC is available and power supply is on
5V The 5V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one
BS-AU module is inserted)
12V The 12V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one
AU-RA/RE unit is connected)
1-16 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Figure 1-9: BS-PS-AC Front Panel
The BS-PS-AC provides a power input connector (marked AC IN) for
connecting the AC power cable to the mains.
The ON/OFF power switch controls the connection of the mains power
to an AC to DC converter.
Table 1-8: BS-PS-AC LEDs Functionality
Name Description
3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3V power supply module is OK (3.3V
power supply is not used by current BreezeACCESS modules)
5V Green LED. Indicates that the 5V power supply module is OK
12V Green LED. Indicates that the 12V power supply module is OK
OVER TEMP Red LED. Indicates an Over Temperature condition in the power supply
module
NOTE:
If the Over Temp indication stays on for more than 10 seconds, the power supply
module will shut itself offautomatically to prevent damage.
IF Based Equipment 1-17
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The BS-AU
Figure 1-10: BS-AU Front Panel
WARNING:
If two power supply modules are used in the same chassis for redundancy, both power
supplies must be of the same type. Do not use a mix of AC and DC power supply
modules in the same chassis.
1-18 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
The BS-AU provides the following interfaces:
!An Ethernet connector (marked ETH) for connecting the BS-AU to
the network. A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect
the module to a hub, router or switch.
!An IF connector for connecting the BS-AU to an outdoor unit
(AU-RE).
!A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal
emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes.
The switch on the BS-AU front panel controls the supply of 12 VDC
power to the outdoor unit via the IF cable. The momentary RESET
position of this switch is for resetting the outdoor unit. In the OFF
position, power is not supplied to the outdoor unit, even when the
BS-AU unit is still on.
BS-SH Chassis and Modules
Installation Procedure
1. Install the BS-SH chassis in a 19" cabinet (or place on an appropriate
shelf/table). When mounting the BS-SH chassis on a desktop, screw
on the rubber legs shipped with the unit. To prevent over-heating,
leave a free space of at least 1 U between the upper/lower covers of
the chassis and other units.
2. Connect a ground cable between the ground terminal (located on the
back panel of the BS-SH chassis) and a grounding point (or to the
rack when appropriate).
Table 1-9: BS-AU LEDs
Name Description Functionality
PWR Power supply
12 VDC On – After successful power up,
indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the
outdoor unit.
Off – Power off or DC/DC converter
failure (12 VDC not supplied to the
outdoor unit)
WLNK Wireless link activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the
wireless media
Off – No reception of packets from the
wireless media
ALRM Alarm On – Loss of hopping synchronization (in
Slave mode)
MASTER Master unit On – The unit is configured as Master
IF Based Equipment 1-19
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
3. Carefully insert the BS-PS or BS-PS-AC Power Supply and the BS-AU
modules into their intended slots and push firmly until they are
securely locked. Before inserting the modules, verify that the
switches of all BS-AU modules are in the OFF position. Close the
captive screws attached to each module. Place blank covers over all
the unused slots.
4. Connect the IF cable(s) to the connector(s) marked IF located on the
front panel(s) of the BS-AU module(s) as shown in Figure 1-10‚
page 1-17. The other side of the IF cable should already be connected
to the outdoor unit.
5. If a BS-PS DC power supply is used, connect the DC power cable to
the –48 VDC In jack (marked –48V) located on the front panel of the
BS-PS power supply. If a redundant power supply module is
installed, connect a power cable to it as well. Connect the power
cable(s) to the –48 VDC power source and the black wire to the
-48 VDC contact of the power source. Connect the red wire to the
+ (Return) contact. Connect the shield to the ground.
6. If a BS-PS-AC AC power supply is used, connect the AC power cable
to the AC jack (marked AC IN) located on the front panel of the
BS-PS-AC power supply. If a redundant power supply module is
installed, connect a power cable to that unit as well. Connect the
power cable(s) to the AC mains.
7. Switch the BS-PS or BS-PS-AC power supplies to ON. Verify that all
the power indicator LEDs on the front panel are on. If you are using
a BS-PS-AC power supply module, verify that the OVERTEMP alarm
indicator is off.
8. Configure the basic parameters in all BS-AU modules as described in
Book 3: Commissioning. Set the switches on the front panel of all
BS-AU modules in the chassis to ON only after all the basic
parameters have been configured properly. This is to avoid
transmitting at undesired frequencies.
NOTE:
Disconnect the IF cable from the BS-AU module before inserting or removing it to/from
the BS-SH chassis.
1-20 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Installing the GU-A-BS GPS
and Alarms System
BS-GU Front Panel
Figure 1-11: BS-GU Front Panel
IF Based Equipment 1-21
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 1-10: BS-GU Connectors
Connector Name Functionality
SYNC IN Receives signals from the GPS antenna unit.
If more than one collocated BS-GU module uses a single GPS
antenna, this connector is used by a “Slave” unit to receive
synchronization signals from the “Master” unit.
SYNC OUT Sends synchronization signals to “Slave” BS-GU modules.
AL IN Four connections to receive indications from external devices.
AL OUT Three relay outputs to external devices.
ETH Ethernet 10BaseT interface. Use a straight cable to connect
directly to a PC. Use a crossed cable to connect to a hub.
Table 1-11: Front Panel LEDs and Switches
LED Name Functionality
PWR (green) On – Power supply functioning properly.
Off – Power supply not functioning properly.
OK (green) On – Proper signals are being received from the GPS antenna.
Off – The GPS antenna is not connected or it is not functioning
properly.
A1 (red) On – Alarm In 1 (external) is activated.
A2 (red) On – Alarm In 2 (external) is activated.
A3 (red) On – Alarm In 3 (external) is activated.
A4 (red) On – Alarm In 4 (external) is activated.
A5, A6 (red) Reserved for future use.
Ethernet Activity -
Ethernet Connector
embedded LED (green)
On – Receiving traffic on the Ethernet port.
Off – No activity on the Ethernet port.
Ethernet Integrity -
Ethernet Connector
Embedded LED
(orange)
On – Unit is connected to an Ethernet segment.
Off – Unit is not connected to an Ethernet segment.
Reset Press this button with a paper clip or similar object in order to
reset the unit.
1-22 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
Installing the GU-RA GPS Antenna
1. Screw the GPS antenna firmly to the special 1” threaded pole.
2. Use the mounting kit supplied with the unit (or any other suitable
means) to secure the GPS antenna pole to an existing pole (e.g. any
pole used for mounting base station antennas or the outdoor units of
the BreezeACCESS Access Units). Choose the location to ensure an
obstacle-free line of sight from the GPS antenna to the sky, extending
at least 30 degrees in all directions.
Figure 1-12: GPS Installation
3. Secure the GPS cable to the mounting pole, leaving a free length of
cable (with the 12-pin round connector at the end) sufficient for
connecting to the antenna module.
4. Connect the 12-pin round connector to the GPS antenna.
5. Route the cable to the location intended for installation of the BS-GU
module.
WARNING:
The cable is very heavy and connecting it to the antenna without first securing it to the
pole may damage the connector.
IF Based Equipment 1-23
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Installing the BS-GU module
Inserting the BS-GU Module and Connecting
It to the Antenna
1. Carefully insert the BS-GU module into any of the free suitable slots
in the BS-SH chassis and push firmly until it is securely locked.
Close the captive screws attached to the module.
2. Connect the 9-pin micro D-Type connector of the GPS cable to the
SYNC IN connector (the top-left connector) of the BS-GU module.
Daisy-chaining Two or More BS-GU
Modules
If two or more BS-GU modules are installed in different collocated
BS-SH chassis, use a synchronization cable (supplied separately) to
connect the SYNC OUT connector of the first (Master) module to the
SYNC IN connector of the second module. The SYNC OUT of this second
module may be connected to the SYNC IN of a third module, and so on.
NOTE:
Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation
professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever
applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities.
Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS product warranty and may expose the
end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers
or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with
the installation of outdoor units or antennas.
NOTE:
When adding the BS-GU to an active base station, it is recommended to start by
reconfiguring the AU previously defined as Master to Slave, then immediately inserting
and configuring the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter in the BS-GU
module. Otherwise both the Master AU and the BS-GU will send conflicting
synchronization signals to the Slave AUs. During this process, connectivity with the
Subscriber Units will be interrupted. It is recommended to perform the upgrade during a
planned downtime or at a time of minimal traffic. Properly configuring the value of the
Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter in the BS-GU is mandatory for proper
operation of the base station. All other parameters of the BS-GU module may be
configured later as they do not impact the operation of the system.
WARNING:
Deactivate the power to the BS-GU unit before connecting it to a GPS antenna. Switch
on the BS-GU only after the GPS antenna has been connected.
1-24 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Installation
Manual Revision: 1.01
BreezeACCESS V
System Manual Book 3:
Commissioning
Using This Guide
After completing the installation process as described in Book 2:
Installation, the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the
unit operates properly and to provide wireless connectivity. Once the
basic parameters have been configured properly, additional parameters
can be remotely configured via either the Ethernet port or the wireless
link using Telnet or SNMP management.
For further information concerning any of the parameters described in
this section, consult Book 4: Operation and Administration.
Commissioning
Table of Contents
Setting
Basic Parameters ....................................................1-1
Accessing the Monitor Program ..............................................1-2
Accessing the Monitor Program using the
RS 232 MON Connector ....................................................1-2
Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet .....................1-4
Operating the Monitor Program ..........................................1-4
Configuring Basic Parameters in
Access and Subscriber Units ...................................................1-5
Introduction .........................................................................1-5
Configuring IP Parameters .................................................1-5
Configuring ESSID Parameters ..........................................1-6
Configuring Frequency Hopping Parameters ....................1-7
Configuring VLAN Parameters ...........................................1-8
Configuring Best AU Parameters (SU Only) ......................1-8
Configuring Preferred AU Mac Address (SU Only) ............1-8
Configuring Security Parameters .......................................1-8
Resetting the Unit ...............................................................1-9
Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS Units ...........................1-10
Introduction .......................................................................1-10
Configuring IP Parameters ...............................................1-10
Configuring Hopping Parameters .....................................1-11
Configuring VLAN Parameters .........................................1-11
Resetting the Unit .............................................................1-11
Optimizing
the Wireless Link .....................................................2-1
RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration
(Subscriber Units) ......................................................................2-2
Aligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit .............2-3
Connecting
External Alarm
Devices ....................................................................3-1
Connecting External Devices to the
GU-BS AL IN and/or AL OUT Connectors ...............................3-2
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Chapter 1
Setting
Basic Parameters
This chapter explains how to configure the basic parameters of the
BreezeACCESS system and includes the following section:
!Accessing the Monitor Program‚ page 1-2, explains how to access
your BreezeACCESS units for configuration.
!Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units‚
page 1-5, outlines the basic configuration process for
BreezeACCESS AU and SUs.
!Configuring Parameters in GU-A-BS Units‚ page 1-10, outlines the
basic configuration process for BreezeACCESS BS-GU units.
About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Accessing the Monitor
Program
Accessing the Monitor Program
using the RS 232 MON Connector
1. Use the monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the unit to
the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC. The COM port
connector on the monitor cable is a 9-pin D-type plug.
2. Run a terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal™).
3. Set the communication parameters as follows:
4. Press Enter. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access
level according to your authorized access level. You will be requested
to enter your password. After entering the correct password, press
Enter.
Table 1-1‚ page 1-3 lists the default passwords for each of the access
levels.
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Parity None
Flow Control Xon/Xoff
Connector Connected COM port
Setting Basic Parameters 1-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 1-1: Default Passwords
Figure 1-1: Main Menu – Administrator Access Rights (SU and AU)
The appearance of the Main Menu varies in accordance with the set
access level.
!For users with Read Only access rights, only the Info Screens option
is displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Unit
Control, Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced
Configuration menus.
!For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items
(Info Screens, Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey) are
displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Advanced
Configuration menu.
!For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu will
be displayed. These users can access all the menu items.
Access Rights Password
Read Only public
Installer user
Administrator private
NOTE:
Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords) from either the
monitor port or via Telnet, the monitor program will be blocked for five minutes. To
access the monitor program during this time, the unit must be reset (via SNMP or by
disconnecting/reconnecting power).
BreezeACCESS/AU-BS
Official Release Version – 4.0.40
Release Date: Thu Dec 20 20:21:36 2001
Main Menu
=====================
1 – Info Screens
2 – Unit Control
3 – Basic Configuration
4 – Site Survey
5 – Advanced Configuration
X - Exit
>>>
1-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Accessing the Monitor Program
using Telnet
1. Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the unit. See the table below to
determine the type of cable. Configure the PC’s IP parameters to
enable connectivity with the unit (the default IP Address is 10.0.0.1).
Run the Telnet application.
Table 1-2: Required Type of Ethernet Cable
2. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access level
according to your authorized access rights. You will be requested to
enter your password. After entering the correct password press
Enter. Default passwords are listed in Table 1-1‚ page 1-3.
3. The Main Menu appears. Proceed as you would after connecting via
the MON port.
Operating the Monitor Program
1. Type an option number to open/activate the option. You may need to
press Enter in some cases.
2. Press Esc to exit a menu or option.
3. You can log-out and exit the monitor program from the Main Menu by
selecting X (exit). (To get to the Main Menu from anywhere in the
program, press the Esc key several times). You can also exit the
monitor program from anywhere in the program by simultaneously
pressing the Ctrl and X keys.
4. Reset the unit after making configuration changes for the new values
to take effect.
NOTE:
The Main Menu of the GU-BS (GPS and Alarms module) does not include the Basic
Configuration option.
Unit Type Connection to a
PC Connection to a
hub
Subscriber Units Straight Crossed
Access Units Crossed Straight
GPS module Straight Crossed
NOTE:
The program will terminate automatically after a given period of inactivity specified by
the Log-Out Timer parameter.
Setting Basic Parameters 1-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Configuring Basic Parameters
in Access and Subscriber
Units
Introduction
The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters that are
necessary for the initial installation and operation of BreezeACCESS
units. Once the unit is properly installed and operational, other
parameters can be configured using the monitor program or via either
the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP
management.
Refer to Book 4: Operations and Administration for detailed information
on the applicable parameters.
Configuring IP Parameters
1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select the DHCP Client menu
2. From the DHCP Client menu, select the DHCP Options menu and
choose the required option: Disable, DHCP Only or Automatic.
!If you have selected Disable, configure the following parameters:
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select IP Address.
The IP Address configuration screen appears. Enter the
required IP address.
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select Subnet Mask.
The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears. Enter the
required subnet mask.
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select Default Gateway
Address.
The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears.
Enter the required default gateway address.
!If you have selected DHCP Only, select Access to DHCP. The
Access to DHCP menu opens. Select the required access option:
From Ethernet Port Only, From Wireless Port Only or From
Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports.
!If you have selected Automatic, configure the following
parameters:
1-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select Access to DHCP.
The Access to DHCP menu opens. Select the required access
option: From Ethernet Port Only, From Wireless Port
Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports.
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select IP Address.
The IP Address configuration screen appears. Enter the
required IP address.
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select Subnet Mask.
The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears. Enter the
required subnet mask.
"From the Basic Configuration menu, select Default Gateway
Address.
The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears.
Enter the required default gateway address.
Configuring ESSID Parameters
1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select ESSID.
The ESSID configuration screen appears. Enter the required ESSID.
If you are configuring an Access unit, configure the following parameters
in addition to the ESSID.
2. From the Basic Configuration menu select Operator ESSID
Parameters. From the Operator ESSID Parameters menu, select
Operator ESSID Option.
The Operator ESSID Option configuration screen appears. Select
Enable or Disable as required.
If Enable is selected, select Operator ESSID from the Operator ESSID
Parameters menu. Enter the required Operator ESSID
If Disable is selected, the Operator ESSID does not need to be
configured.
NOTE:
The ESSID and the Operator ESSID are case sensitive.
Setting Basic Parameters 1-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Configuring Frequency Hopping
Parameters
1. In units where Hopping Band selection is available, select Hopping
Band from the Basic Configuration menu. The Hopping Band
configuration screen appears. Enter the required hopping band
option: ISM US FCC, ISM International or Flexible Hopping
Definition.
!If the selection in the Hopping Band configuration screen was
Flexible Hopping Definition, or if Hopping Band is not
available, proceed to Step 2.
!If the selection in the Hopping Band configuration screen was
other than Flexible Hopping Definition and you are configuring
an AU-BS unit, proceed to Step 5. Otherwise, continue to the
next parameter.
2. From the Flexible Hopping Definition menu, use the Add Frequencies
and Remove Frequencies options to define the frequencies to be
used. You can use the Erase All option to delete all entries from the
existing list. Refer to Appendix C for a complete list of the standard
MMDS channels and frequencies.
3. From the Flexible Hopping Definition menu, select Scrambling
Definition.
The Scrambling Definition menu opens.
4. From the Scrambling Definition menu select Scrambling Mode.
The Scrambling Mode configuration screen appear. Select the
required mode: Standard Scrambling, Manual Scrambling or
Enhanced Scrambling.
!If Standard Scrambling is selected, there is no need to define
other scrambling parameters.
!If Manual Scrambling is selected, select Manual Sequence
Definition in the Scrambling Definition menu. The Manual
Sequence Definition configuration screen appears. Enter the
required sequence.
!If Enhanced Scrambling was selected, there is no need to
define other scrambling parameters unless you are configuring
an Access unit. If you are configuring an Access unit, select
Spanning Factor in the Scrambling Definition menu. The
Spanning Factor configuration screen appears. Enter the
required value for the Spanning Factor.
5. If you are configuring an AU-BS Modular Access Unit, the Hopping
Sync and Hopping Shift parameters must be configured.
!Select Hopping Sync from the Basic Configuration menu.
The Hopping Sync configuration screen appears. Select the
required hopping sync option: Idle, Slave or Master.
1-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
!Select Hopping Shift from the Basic Configuration menu.
The Hopping Shift configuration screen appears. Select the
required hopping shift value.
Configuring VLAN Parameters
1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select VLAN Support.
The VLAN Support menu appears.
2. From the VLAN Support menu, select VLAN Link Type.
The VLAN Link Type configuration screen appears. Select the
required option: Hybrid, Access or Trunk Link.
3. From the VLAN Support menu, select VLAN ID – Management (VLAN
ID – Voice and Management in subscriber units with voice support).
The VLAN ID – Management (or VLAN ID – Voice and Management)
configuration screen appears. Select the required VLAN ID value
(enter 65535 for no VLAN).
Configuring Best AU Parameters
(SU Only)
1. From the Basic Configuration menu select Best AU Parameters.
The Best AU Parameters menu opens.
2. From the Best AU Parameters menu, select Best AU Support. Select
the required option, Enable or Disable.
Configuring Preferred AU Mac
Address (SU Only)
!If Best AU Support is enabled, you may elect to set the
Preferred AU MAC Address parameter by selecting Preferred
AU MAC Address from the Best AU Parameters menu and
entering the MAC address of the preferred AU.
Configuring Security Parameters
1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Security Parameters.
The Security Parameters menu opens
2. If the required authentication algorithm is Open System, select
Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu.
The Authentication Algorithm menu opens.
Select Open System.
3. If the required algorithm is Shared Key, do the following:
Setting Basic Parameters 1-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!Define at least one of the four WEP Keys by selecting one of
them from the Security Parameters menu and entering the
required key.
!Select Default Key ID from the Security Parameters menu and
enter the number of a defined WEP key.
!Select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters
menu.
The Authentication Algorithm menu opens.
Select Shared Key.
Resetting the Unit
After completing the process of configuring the basic parameters, the
unit should be reset so that all new settings are applied.
1. From the Main Menu, select Unit Control.
The Unit Control menu opens.
2. From the Unit Control menu, select Reset Unit.
The Reset Unit configuration screen opens. Type 1 to reset the unit
so that new configuration settings are applied.
NOTE:
The Shared Key option cannot be selected until at least one WEP Key and the
appropriate Default Key ID are configured.
1-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Configuring Parameters in
GU-A-BS Units
Introduction
This section describes all the parameters that are necessary for the
initial installation and operation of GU-RA units. Once the unit is
properly installed and operational, other parameters can be configured
using the monitor program via Telnet or SNMP management.
Since all the parameters needed are found in the Advanced
Configuration menu, Admistrator level access is required in order to
configure a GU-RA unit.
Refer to Book 4: Operation and Administration for detailed information
on the applicable parameters.
Configuring IP Parameters
1. From the Advanced Configuration menu, select DHCP Client.
The DHCP Client menu appears.
2. From the DHCP Client menu, select DHCP Options
The DHCP Options menu opens. Choose the required option:
Disable, DHCP Only or Automatic.
If DHCP Only is selected, proceed to the next parameter.
If Disable or Automatic is selected, continue to step 3.
3. From the Basic Configuration menu, select IP Address.
The IP Address configuration screen appears. Enter the required IP
address.
4. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Subnet Mask.
The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears. Enter the required
subnet mask.
5. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Default Gateway
Address.
The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears. Enter
the required default gateway address.
NOTE:
The GU-RA does not have an external MON port, and therefore must be configured
using Telnet.
Setting Basic Parameters 1-11
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Configuring Hopping Parameters
1. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Hopping Parameters.
The Hopping Parameters menu opens.
2. From the Hopping Parameters menu, select Number of Hopping
Frequencies.
The Number of Hopping Frequencies configuration screen appears.
Enter the number of hopping frequencies used by the system.
3. From the Hopping Parameters menu, select Synchronization Signal
Source.
The Synchronization Signal Source configuration screen appears.
Select the required option: GPS Antenna or Internal or Local (from
other GU).
Configuring VLAN Parameters
1. From the Advanced Configuration menu, select Bridge Parameters.
The Bridge Parameters menu appears.
2. From the Bridge Parameters menu, select VLAN Support.
The VLAN Support menu appears.
3. From the VLAN Support menu, select VLAN ID – Management.
The VLAN ID – Management configuration screen appears. Select the
required VLAN ID value (enter 65535 for no VLAN).
Resetting the Unit
After completing the process of configuring the basic parameters, the
unit should be reset so that all new settings are applied.
1. From the Main Menu, select Unit Control.
The Unit Control menu opens.
2. From the Unit Control menu, select Reset Unit.
The Reset Unit configuration screen opens. Type 1 to reset the unit
so that new configuration settings are applied.
NOTE:
You may determine the number of hopping frequencies being used by the system by
viewing Number of Hopping Frequencies in the Show Basic Configuration screen of
any configured AU.
1-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 2
Optimizing
the Wireless Link
This chapter explains how to optimize the performance of the wireless
link of BreezeACCESS Subscriber Units and includes the following
sections:
!RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration
(Subscriber Units)‚ page 2-2, explains how to read the RSSI
measurement and to configure the optimum value for the Maximum
Data Rate parameter.
!Aligning the Antenna of the SU-A/E Subscriber Unit‚ page 2-3,
give tips and instructions for aligning the antenna of the SU-A/E for
optimum performance.
About This Chapter
2-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
RSSI Measurement and
Maximum Data Rate
Configuration (Subscriber
Units)
The Continuous Link Quality Display test allows a continuously
updated display of the average Received Signal Strength Indication
(RSSI). As the test measures only the desired signal of properly received
frames, it is a good indication of the quality of the received signal.
1. From the Main Menu, select Site Survey.
The Site Survey menu opens.
From the Site Survey menu, select Continuous Link Quality
Display.
On the screen you will see a continuously updated display of RSSI
measurements. The display can be in either dBm units or RSSI
units. To change the display option, select RSSI Display in the Site
Survey menu and choose the required option. To stop the
Continuous Link Quality Display test, press the Esc key.
2. From the Basic Configuration menu, select Maximum Data Rate.
The Maximum Data Rate configuration screen appears.
3. Configure the value of the Maximum Data Rate parameter
according to the following table, taking into account a 3 dB safety
margin above the applicable sensitivity level
4. Reset the unit for the new configuration to become effective.
NOTE:
The RSSI bar display is meaningful only after the Access Unit you wish to associate
with is operational and the basic parameters in the Subscriber Unit were properly
configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the
Access Unit. As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames, its results
are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit.
Maximum Data
Rate 3 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps
SU-A/E RSSI>-67dBm -75dBm<RSSI<-67dBm RSSI<-75dBm
Optimizing the Wireless Link 2-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Aligning the Antenna of the
SU-A/E Subscriber Unit
1. Verify that the outdoor unit’s Power indication is on.
2. Align the antenna (integrated into the front side of the SU-RA outdoor
unit or separate if the unit is an SU-RE) to point in the general
direction of the base station.
3. The RSSI bar display is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor
unit. The eight green RSSI LEDs are used for reading the Received
Signal Strength Indication. The higher the number of green LEDs
that are on, the higher the level of the received signal. Rotate the
antenna left and/or right until you reach the maximum RSSI reading
(as many green bars lit as possible). Make sure that at all times the
front of the antenna faces the general direction of the base station.
4. For proper operation, at least one green LED should be on. If you
cannot reach a point where at least one green LED is on, try to
improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher
point or in a different location.
5. Firmly secure the unit (SU-RA) or the antenna to the pole.
NOTE:
Antenna alignment using the RSSI bar display is possible only after the Access Unit you
wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters in the Subscriber Unit
were properly configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to synchronize and
associate with the Access Unit. As the RSSI measurement is performed on received
frames, its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access
Unit.
NOTE:
As the RSSI bar indicator is not accurate, it is recommended to use the Continuous Link
Quality Display test for more precise alignment of the antenna.
NOTE:
In some cases (e.g., when the Subscriber Unit is very close to the Base Station), the
antenna may have to be installed at an appropriate angle, in order to ensure that it is
directed towards the base station antenna.
2-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 3
Connecting
External Alarm
Devices
This chapter explains how to connect external devices to the AL IN and
AL OUT connectors of the Base Station unit.
About This Chapter
3-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Connecting External Devices
to the GU-BS AL IN and/or AL
OUT Connectors
Open-ended cables are available from the company for connecting to the
module external alarm inputs through the AL IN connector and/or
activating external devices through the AL OUT connector. See the
tables that follow for descriptions of the connectors’ pins functionality.
For details on defining and using the alarm inputs and output, refer to
Book 4: Operation and Administration.
Alarms In Cable
The other side of the cable is supplied open-ended.
WARNING:
The load of the Alarm Out (AL OUT) connector should not exceed 24 V@1 A max.
9-pin Micro D-Type
AL IN Connector Description Color Code
1Alarm Input 1 Brown
2Alarm Input 2 White
3Alarm Input 3 Green
4Alarm Input 4 Red
5Not Connected Black
6GND Purple
7GND Yellow
8GND Orange
9GND Blue
External Devices 3-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Alarms Out Cable
The other side of the cable is supplied open-ended.
9-pin Micro D-Type
AL OUT Connector Description Color Code
1Relay 1 Common Brown
2Relay 1 Normally Closed White
3Relay 2 Common Green
4Relay 3 Common Red
5Relay 3 Normally Closed Black
6Relay 1 Normally Open Purple
7Relay 2 Normally Closed Yellow
8Relay 2 Normally Open Orange
9Relay 3 Normally Open Blue
3-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 4
Verifying
Proper Operation
This chapter explains how to confirm that the BreezeACCESS system is
functioning properly and includes the following sections:
!Verifying Connectivity‚ page 4-2, explains how to ensure that your
BreezeACCESS and the equipment connected to them are operating
properly.
!LED Indicators‚ page 4-4, lists the LEDs found on BreezeACCESS
units and their meanings.
About This Chapter
4-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
Verifying Connectivity
Verifying the Ethernet Connection
Once you have connected the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the
Ethernet Integrity indicator (the yellow LED embedded in the Ethernet
connector) is on, indicating that the unit is connected to an Ethernet
segment. The Ethernet Activity indicator (the green embedded LED)
should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the
Ethernet port.
Verifying Data Connectivity
(Subscriber Unit)
From a user’s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit, ping the
Access Unit or try to connect to the Internet.
Verifying Telephone Connectivity
(Subscriber Units with Voice
support)
To verify correct operation of the telephone, a test telephone with the
default telephony parameters and a known IP address should be
connected to the system (the location of the test telephone is determined
by the system administrator).
Perform the following steps to verify telephone connectivity:
1. Use IP dialing to call the test telephone: dial * followed by the 12-digit
IP address of the test telephone. Verify connectivity. During the
conversation, verify that the other party has your IP address.
2. After terminating the call, the other party should use the test
telephone to call your IP address and verify that the telephone,
including the ringing circuits, functions properly.
Verifying Proper Operation 4-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Verifying Proper Operation of the
GU-RA GPS Antenna
When the unit is operating properly, the PWR and OK green LEDS
should be on, indicating that the unit is supplying power to the GPS
antenna and that the GPS antenna is functioning properly.
If the OK LED is not on, check the functionality of the GPS antenna as
follows:
1. From the Main Menu, select Info Screens.
The Info Screens menu opens.
2. From the Info Screen menu, select Show Unit Status and view the
Unit Status display. You should see one of the following messages:
UTC is available; date..; time..: This message indicates that
the GPS antenna has synchronized with the satellite system and that
the BS-GU is functioning properly. The message may include an
incorrect time and date, such as a date in 1999: this indicates that
the GPS antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite
system.
–Or–
UTC time is not available: This message indicates that the
BS-GU is not getting timing signals from the GPS antenna. If the
antenna is functioning and properly connected to the module, a
probable reason might be that the antenna has not yet synchronized
with the GPS satellite system.
NOTE:
It may take up to 10 minutes from the time the GU-RA GPS antenna is powered up until
it is fully synchronized with the GPS satellite system.
4-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
LED Indicators
To verify correct operation of the units, view the status of the relevant
LED indicators:
SU-RA/RE Outdoor Units LEDs
AU-RE Outdoor Units LEDs
Name Description Functionality
ALARM Alarm
indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the
locking process of any of the synthesizers
Off – Normal operation
WLNK Wireless link
activity Blinking – Receiving packet from the wireless link
Off – No reception of packets from the wireless link
ETH Ethernet
activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet
LAN
Off – No activity on the Ethernet LAN
Name Description Functionality
ALARM Alarm
indication On – A problem with the power amplifier or in the
locking process of any of the synthesizers
Off –Normal operation
12V IN 12 VDC
Power
Indication
On – 12 VDC power is supplied to the unit
Off – 12 VDC power is not available
ETH Ethernet
activity Blinking – Data received from or transmitted to
Ethernet LAN
Off – No activity on the Ethernet LAN
Verifying Proper Operation 4-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
SU-NI and AU-NI Indoor Units LEDs
BS-PS DC Power Supply Module
LEDs
BS-PS-AC AC Power Supply Module
LEDs
Name Description Functionality
PWR Power supply On – After successful power up, indicating that 12 VDC is
supplied to the outdoor unit.
Off – Power off or DC/DC converter failure (12 VDC not
supplied to the outdoor unit)
WLNK Wireless link
activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the wireless media
Off – No reception of packets from the wireless media
Name Description
ON -48 VDC is available and Power Supply is ON
5V The 5V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one
BS-AU module is inserted)
12V The 12V power supply module is OK and power is consumed (at least one
AU-RA/RE unit is connected)
Name Description
3.3V Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3 V power supply module is OK
(3.3V power supply is not used by current BreezeACCESS modules)
5V Green LED. Indicates that the 5 V power supply module is OK
12V Green LED. Indicates that the 12 V power supply module is OK
OVERTEMP Red LED. Indicates an Over Temperature condition in the power
supply module
4-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Commissioning
Manual Revision: 1.01
BS-AU LEDs
BS-GU LEDs
Name Description Functionality
PWR Power supply
12 VDC On – After successful power up, indicating that 12 VDC is
supplied to the outdoor unit.
Off – Power off or DC/DC converter failure (12 VDC not
supplied to the outdoor unit)
WLNK Wireless link
activity Blinking – Receiving packets from the wireless media
Off – No reception of packets from the wireless media
ALRM Alarm On – Loss of hopping synchronization (in Slave mode)
MASTER Master unit On – The unit is configured as Master
LED Name Functionality
PWR (green) On – Power supply functioning properly.
Off – Power supply not functioning properly.
OK (green) On – Proper signals are being received from the GPS antenna.
Off – The GPS antenna is not connected or it is not functioning
properly.
A1 (red) On – Alarm In 1 (external) is activated.
A2 (red) On – Alarm In 2 (external) is activated.
A3 (red) On – Alarm In 3 (external) is activated.
A4 (red) On – Alarm In 4 (external) is activated.
A5, A6 (red) Reserved for future use.
BreezeACCESS V
System Manual Book 4:
Operations and Administration
Operations
and Administration
Table of Contents
Accessing the
Monitor Program ......................................................1-1
Accessing the Monitor Program using the
RS 232 MON Connector ............................................................1-2
Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet ........................1-4
Operating the Monitor Program ...............................................1-6
Menus
and Parameters .......................................................2-1
Main Menu ..................................................................................2-2
Info Screens Menu .....................................................................2-3
Show Unit Status ................................................................2-3
Show Basic Parameters .....................................................2-5
Show Advanced Parameters ..............................................2-5
Show All Parameters ..........................................................2-5
Unit Control Menu ......................................................................2-6
Basic Configuration Menu ......................................................2-10
Site Survey Menu .....................................................................2-12
Traffic Statistics (AU and SU) ...........................................2-12
Voice Statistics (SU with Voice Support Only) .................2-15
Per Hop Statistics (AU and SU) .......................................2-15
Ping Test (AU, SU and GU) .............................................2-16
Continuous Link Quality Display
(Available in SU Only) ......................................................2-17
MAC Address Database (Available in AU Only) ...............2-17
Per-rate Counters (AU and SU) .......................................2-19
RSSI Display Option (AU and SU) ...................................2-20
Advanced Configuration Menu ...............................................2-21
IP Parameters (AU, SU and GU) ......................................2-21
Air Interface Parameters (AU and SU) .............................2-22
Network Management Parameters (AU, SU and GU) ......2-41
Bridge Parameters (AU, SU and GU) ...............................2-43
Performance Parameters (AU and SU) ............................2-55
Service Parameters (AU and SU) ....................................2-58
ii BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Security Parameters (AU and SU) ...................................2-62
Voice Parameters
(Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) ....................2-63
Dialing Parameters
(Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) ....................2-64
Telephony Signals
(Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only) .....................2-71
Hopping Parameters (GU) ...............................................2-77
Alarm Parameters (GU) ...................................................2-78
Configuration
Download/Upload .....................................................3-1
Chapter 1
Accessing the
Monitor Program
This chapter explains how to access the monitor program. It also
describes how to use the monitor program to set up, configure, and
manage BreezeACCESS Broadband Wireless Access system units. This
includes the Subscriber Units (SUs), Access Units (AUs) and GPS and
Alarms modules (GUs).
About This Chapter
1-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Accessing the Monitor
Program using the RS 232
MON Connector
1. Use the monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the unit to
the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC. The COM port
connector on the monitor cable is a 9-pin D-type plug.
2. Run a terminal emulation program (such as HyperTerminal™).
3. Set the communication parameters to the following:
4. Press Enter. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access
level according to your authorized access level. You will be requested
to enter your password. After entering the correct password, press
Enter.
Table 1-1‚ page 3 lists the default passwords for each of the access
levels.
NOTE:
The GU-BS GPS and Alarms module does not have an external MON port. It does have
an internal MON port that can be used in laboratory conditions (consult Alvarion
technical support for further details). It is recommended to use Telnet to access the
monitor program of the GU-BS.
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Parity None
Flow Control Xon/Xoff
Connector Connected COM port
Accessing the Monitor Program 1-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 1-1: Default Passwords
Access Rights Password
Read Only public
Installer user
Administrator private
NOTE:
Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords) from either the
monitor port or via Telnet, the monitor program will be blocked for five minutes. To
enable access to the monitor program during that time, the unit must be reset (via
SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power).
1-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Accessing the Monitor
Program using Telnet
1. Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the unit. See the table below to
determine the type of cable. Configure the PC’s IP parameters to
enable connectivity with the unit (the default IP Address is 10.0.0.1).
Run the Telnet application.
Table 1-2: Required Type of Ethernet Cable
2. The Select Access Level menu appears. Select the access level
according to your authorized access level. You will be requested to
enter your password. After entering the correct password press
Enter.
The Main Menu appears.
Figure 1-1: Main Menu – Administrator Access Rights (SU and AU)
The appearance of the Main Menu varies in accordance with the set
access level.
Unit Type Connection to a
PC Connection to a
Hub
Subscriber Units Straight Crossed
Access Units Crossed Straight
GPS module Straight Crossed
BreezeACCESS/AU-BS
Official Release Version – 4.0.40
Release Date: Thu Dec 20 20:21:36 2001
Main Menu
=====================
1 – Info Screens
2 – Unit Control
3 – Basic Configuration
4 – Site Survey
5 – Advanced Configuration
X - Exit
>>>
Accessing the Monitor Program 1-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!For users with Read Only access rights, only the Info Screens option
is displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Unit
Control, Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced
Configuration menus.
!For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items
(Info Screens, Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey) are
displayed. Users with this access level cannot access the Advanced
Configuration menu.
!For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu will
be displayed. These users can access all the menu items.
NOTE:
The Main Menu of the GU-BS (GPS and Alarms module) does not include the Basic
Configuration option.
1-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Operating the Monitor
Program
1. Type an option number to open/activate the option. You may need to
press Enter in some cases.
2. Press Esc to exit a menu or option.
3. You can log-out and exit the monitor program from the Main Menu by
selecting X (exit). To get to the Main Menu from anywhere in the
program, press the Esc key several times. You can also exit the
monitor from anywhere in the program by simultaneously pressing
the Ctrl and X keys.
4. Reset the unit after making configuration changes for the new values
to take effect.
NOTE:
The program will terminate automatically after a given period of inactivity specified by
the Log-Out Timer parameter.
NOTE:
Most parameters take effect only after the unit is reset. However, some parameters
take effect immediately (run-time configurable). Appendix D includes information on all
parameters, including which are run-time configurable.
Chapter 2
Menus
and Parameters
This chapter describes the BreezeACCESS configuration menus and
parameters. It includes the following sections:
! Main Menu‚ page 2-2.
!Info Screens Menu‚ page 2-3.
!Unit Control Menu‚ page 2-6.
! Basic Configuration Menu‚ page 2-10.
!Site Survey Menu‚ page 2-12.
!Advanced Configuration Menu‚ page 2-21.
About This Chapter
2-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Main Menu
From the Main Menu you can access the following menus, depending on
your access level:
!Info Screens – Provides read-only display of current parameter
values. Available at all access levels.
!Unit Control – Enables access to general operations such as
resetting the unit, loading the default parameters, changing
passwords and switching between software versions. Available at
the Installer and Administrator access levels.
!Basic Configuration – Enables access to the set of parameters that
should be configured as a part of the installation process. These
parameters are also accessible from the Advanced Configuration
menu. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels in
SU and AU (does not exist in GU).
!Site Survey – Enables activation of certain tests and viewing of
various system counters. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
!Advanced Configuration – Enables access to all system
parameters, including the parameters that are included in the Basic
Configuration menu. Available only at the Administrator access
level.
!Exit – Enables log-out and exit from the monitor program. Available
at all access levels.
Menus and Parameters 2-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Info Screens Menu
Figure 2-1: Info Screens Menu
The Info Screens menu enables viewing of the current values of various
parameter sets. The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter
groups in the configuration menus. The user can view a specific
parameter set or can elect to view all parameters (S). This menu is
available for all access levels.
Show Unit Status
The Show Unit Status menu displays the current values of the following
parameters:
!Unit Type – Identifies the unit’s function as one of the following:
Access Unit, Subscriber Unit or GPS and Alarms Module.
!Unit MAC Address – Displays the unit’s unique IEEE MAC address.
!Unit Hardware Version – Displays the hardware version of the unit
(the indoor module of IF based products).
!Flash Type – Displays the type and size of the Flash memory.
!Flash Versions
"Current Version – Displays the software version that is
currently active.
"Shadow Version – Displays the software version currently
defined as the shadow (backup) version.
"Version After Reset – Displays the software version that will
be used after the next reset.
BreezeACCESS/AU-BS
Official Release Version – 4.0.40
Release Date: Thu Dec 20 21:05:08 2001
Info Screens
====================
1 – Show Unit Status
2 – Show Basic Parameters
3 – Show Advanced Parameters
S – Show All Parameters
>>>
2-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!Console Speed – Displays the speed defined in the unit for the
connected terminal, used for running the terminal emulation
program.
!Number of Associations Since Last Reset – In SUs displays the
total number of associations with any AU since the last reset,
including duplicate associations with the same AU. In AUs, displays
the number of SUs that have associated with the AU since the last
reset, including duplicate associations with the same SU.
The following parameters appear for Subscriber Units only:
!Voice Hardware Version (SU with voice support only) – Displays
the hardware version of the voice module.
!Unit Status – Displays the current status of the SU. There are two
possible values:
"SCANNING – The SU is searching for an AU with which to
associate.
"ASSOCIATED – The SU is associated with an AU.
!AU MAC Address – Displays the MAC address of the AU with which
the unit is currently associated. If the unit is not associated with
any AU, the address will be that of the IEEE broadcast address:
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
The following parameter appears for Access Units only:
!Current Number of Associations – Displays the total number of
SUs associated with this AU. This number may include units that
are not currently active, as there is no aging algorithm for
associated SUs.
The following parameter appears for GPS Modules only:
!Unit Status – Indicates the status of the GPS antenna. Either one of
the following messages may be displayed:
"UTC is available; date..; time..: This message
indicates that the GPS antenna has synchronized with the
satellite system and that the BS-GU is functioning properly.
The message may include an incorrect time and date, such
as a date in 1999. This indicates that the GPS antenna has
not yet synchronized with the GPS satellites system.
–Or–
"UTC time is not available: This message indicates that
the BS-GU is not getting timing signals from the GPS
NOTE:
An SU will be removed from the list of associated SUs only upon occurrence of any of
the following: (1) The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC
address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU, or (2) The AU
has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number
of consecutive frames transmitted to it.
Menus and Parameters 2-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
antenna. If the antenna is functioning and properly
connected to the module, this may be because the antenna
has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite system.
Show Basic Parameters
The Show Basic Parameters menu displays the current values of the
parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu (see Basic
Configuration Menu‚ page 2-10). When using Read-Only access rights
the ESSID and WEP Keys are not displayed. The display includes some
additional useful read-only information such as the Number of
Hopping Frequencies in SU and AU.
Show Advanced Parameters
The Show Advanced Parameters menu enables access sub-menus that
display the current values of the parameters included in the applicable
sub-menus of the Advanced Configuration menu (see Advanced
Configuration Menu‚ page 2-21). When using Read-Only access rights
the ESSID (Air Interface Parameters) and WEP Keys (Security
Parameters) are not displayed. The display includes some additional
read-only information such as Number of Hopping Frequencies (Air
Interface Parameters).
Show All Parameters
The Show All Parameters menu displays the current values of all the
parameters included in the Advanced Configuration menu. When using
Read-Only access rights, ESSID and WEP Keys are not displayed. The
display includes some additional useful read-only information such as
the Number of Hopping Frequencies (SU and AU).
2-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Unit Control Menu
The Unit Control menu includes the following options:
!Reset Unit – Resets the BreezeACCESS unit and applies any
changes made to the system parameters.
!Defaults Settings – Resets the unit to a predefined set of default
parameters or to save the current configuration as Operator
Defaults. The available options are:
"Set Defaults – Resets the unit to a set of default parameters.
The following options are available:
#Cancel Request – Exits to the Unit Control menu without
any change.
#Set Complete Factory Defaults – Available only with
Administrator access rights. Resets the unit to the set of
Alvarion’s standard default values. These are the default
values as defined in this manual for each of the
parameters. After the next Reset Unit command (see
above) all parameters will revert to their Factory Defaults
value, except for the Passwords.
#Set Partial Factory Defaults – Resets all parameters to
the values of the Factory Defaults configuration, except
for parameters that are necessary to maintain
connectivity and to enable management. These are the
parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu,
except to the Maximum Data Rate parameter. In addition,
Passwords and VLAN parameters are not changed.
#Set Complete Operator Defaults – Available only with
Administrator access rights. Set the unit to its’ Operator
Defaults configuration. After the next Reset Unit
command (see above) all parameters will revert to their
Operator Defaults values, except for the Passwords.
Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the
Administrator (see Save Current Configuration As
Operator Defaults below). It may also be defined at the
factory according to customer’s definition. The default
Operators Defaults configuration is the Factory Defaults
configuration.
The complete Operator Defaults Configuration file can be
downloaded/uploaded using TFTP with the SNMP Write
NOTE:
Activating Set Complete Factory Defaults will result in loss of connectivity.
If the unit is managed remotely, you may lose the ability to communicate
with it.
Menus and Parameters 2-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
community string. The procedure is the same as for
downloading/uploading configuration files, except that
the extension used for the file name is .cmr.
Examples (using the default SNMP Write community
string):
To upload the configuration file using DOS based TFTP
Client to an SU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cmr.
To download the configuration file from the same unit:
tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cmr Suconf
"Set Partial Operator Defaults – Sets all parameters to the
values of the Operator Defaults configuration, except for
parameters that are necessary to maintain connectivity and
to enable management. These are the parameters included
in the Basic Configuration menu with the exception of the
Maximum Data Rate parameter. In addition, Passwords and
VLAN parameters are not changed.
"Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults –
Defines the current configuration of the unit as the Operator
Defaults configuration. This option is only available with
Administrator access rights.
!Change Unit Name – Changes the name of the unit, which is also
the system name in MIB2. This name is also used as the prompt of
the monitor program menus.
Valid values: A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
!Change Password – Changes the password(s). A user with Installer
access rights can change the passwords for Read Only and Installer
levels. A user with Administrator access rights can change the
passwords of all levels.
Valid values: A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters.
Table 1-1‚ page 1-3 lists the default passwords for each of the access
levels.
NOTE:
Activating Set Complete Operator Defaults will result in loss of connectivity.
If the unit is managed remotely, you may lose the ability to communicate with it.
NOTE:
The Passwords are not changed upon setting the unit to default values (either Partial
or Complete).
2-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!Flash Memory Control – Selects the active software version. The
following options are available:
"Reset and Boot from Shadow Version – Activates the
Shadow (backup) software version. The unit resets
automatically and loads the shadow firmware.
"Use Current Version After Reset – Defines the current
version as the one that will be activated and used after the
next reset.
The flash memory can store two software versions. One version is
called Current and the other is called Shadow. New software
versions are loaded as the Shadow version. You can select the
Shadow version as the new active version by selecting Reset and
Boot from Shadow Version. However, after the next reset, the
Current version will be activated again. If you wish to continue
using the currently active version after the next reset, select Use
Current Version After Reset.
The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of
downloading new software versions (unless the new version includes
additional parameters or other changes in the list of parameters).
New parameters are loaded with their default values.
!Console Speed – Defines the speed at which the unit communicates
with the terminal running the terminal emulation program. This
parameter must be changed prior to changing the speed of the
terminal connected to it.
The allowed speeds are: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200
baud.
The default value is 9600 baud.
!Log Out Timer – Enters a new Log Out Timer value. If the monitor
program is not used for the specified time, the unit will
automatically exit the monitor program.
The allowed range is 1 to 999 minutes.
The default value is 5 minutes.
!Event Log Menu – Controls the event log feature. The event log is
an important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated
for storing it. Events are classified according to their severity level:
Trace (lowest severity), Message, Warning, Error or Fatal (highest
severity).
The severity at which events are saved in the Event Log is
configurable. Events from the configured severity and higher are
saved and may be displayed upon request. Log history can be
displayed up to the full number of current active events. In the log
an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased (a
maximum of 1000 events may be displayed). The error log may be
read using TFTP, with remote file name <SNMP Read
Community>.log (the default SNMP Read Community is public).
Menus and Parameters 2-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The Event Log Menu includes the following options:
"Event Log Policy – Determines the minimal severity level.
All events whose severity is equal to or higher than the
defined severity are logged.
Valid values are: Log All (TRC) Level, Message (MSG)
Level, Warning (WRN) Level, Error (ERR) Level, Fatal
(FTL) Level, Log None.
The default selection is Fatal (FTL) Level.
"Display Event Log – Displays how many events are logged
and selects the number of events to be displayed (up to
1000). The display of each event includes the event time
(elapsed time since last reset), the severity level and a
message string. The events are displayed in descending
order, with the most recent event displayed first.
"Erase Event Log – Clears the event log.
2-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Basic Configuration Menu
The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters that are
necessary for the initial installation and operation of the unit. Once the
unit is properly installed and operational, other parameters can be
configured either locally using the monitor program or remotely using
Telnet, SNMP management or TFTP for loading to the unit a
pre-prepared configuration file.
For more information about the initial configuration of BreezeACCESS
units, see Book 3: Commissioning.
The Basic Configuration menu includes the following submenu
parameters:
IP Parameters
!IP Address (see page 2-21)
!Subnet Mask (see page 2-21)
!Default Gateway Address (see page 2-21)
!DHCP Client (see page 2-22)
Air Interface Parameters
!ESSID (see page 2-33)
!Operator ESSID Parameters (AU) (see page 2-33)
!Hopping Band* (see page 2-22)
!Flexible Hopping Definition* (see page 2-24)
!Hopping Sync (AU-BS) (see page 2-35)
!Hopping Shift (AU-BS) (see page 2-28)
!Best AU Parameters (SU) (see page 2-35)
"Best AU Support
"Preferred AU MAC Address
!Maximum Data Rate (SU) (see page 2-36)
*The Hopping Band and Flexible Hopping Definition parameters are not
available in units configured in the factory to operate in ISM US FCC
hopping standard only (US Option).
VLAN Parameters
!VLAN ID – Management (AU and SU without voice support) (see
page 2-44)
Menus and Parameters 2-11
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!VLAN ID – Voice & Management (SU with voice support) (see page 2-
45)
!VLAN Link Type (see page 2-46)
Security Parameters
!Authentication Algorithm (see page 2-62)
!Default Key ID (see page 2-62)
!WEP Key # 1 (see page 2-62)
!WEP Key # 2 (see page 2-62)
!WEP Key # 3 (see page 2-62)
!WEP Key # 4 (see page 2-62)
NOTE:
All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the appropriate
submenus of the Advanced Configuration menu.
2-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Site Survey Menu
The Site Survey menu provides various tests and counters for verifying
the quality of the wireless link and the proper operation of the unit.
These tests can be used to help determine where to position the units
for optimal coverage, to align antennas and to assist in troubleshooting.
Traffic Statistics (AU and SU)
The traffic statistics can be used to monitor, interpret and analyze the
wired and wireless links performance. The traffic statistics counters
display statistics concerning wireless link and Ethernet frames. The
menu includes the following options:
!Display Counters – Choose this option to display the current value
of the Ethernet and Wireless Link Counters.
!Reset Counters – Choose this option to reset all the counters.
Ethernet Counters
The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards
them to its internal bridge which decides whether the frame should be
transmitted to the wireless media. Frames that were discarded by the
unit’s hardware filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters.
The unit transmits valid data frames that were received from the
wireless media to the Ethernet port, as well as some internally
generated frames (e.g. responses to management queries and pings that
reached the unit from the Ethernet port).
!Total received frames via Ethernet – Displays the total number of
frames received from the Ethernet port.
!Transmitted wireless to Ethernet – Displays the number of frames
transmitted by the unit to the Ethernet port. These are usually
frames that have been received from the wireless side, but also
frames generated by the unit itself.
Menus and Parameters 2-13
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Wireless Link Counters
The unit transmits data frames received from the Ethernet port, as well
as self-generated control and wireless management frames, to the
wireless media. After transmission of a data frame, the unit waits for an
acknowledgement (ACK) message from the receiving unit. Some control
and wireless management frames as well as broadcast and multicast
frames that are sent to more than one unit are not acknowledged. If an
ACK is not received after a predefined time (determined by the
Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter, see page 2-38), the unit will
retransmit the frame until it receives an ACK. If an ACK is not received
before the number of retransmissions has reached a maximum
predefined number (Number of Retransmissions parameter, see
page 2-55), it stops retransmitting and drops the frames.
!Total transmitted frames to wireless – Displays the number of
frames transmitted to the wireless media. The total includes one
count for each data or RTP frame (internally generated voice frame)
that was transmitted successfully (excluding retransmissions) as
well as the number of transmitted control and wireless management
frames.
If the ACSE Option (see page 2-40) is enabled, then in addition to
the total count, there are also separate counters for the total
number of data frames, voice (RTP) frames and beacon frames. The
voice frames include fax frames. This is true also for Subscriber
Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option
parameter in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice count should
be 0.
!Total submitted frames (bridge) – Displays the total number of
data and RTP frames submitted to the bridge for transmission to the
wireless media. The count does not include control frames, wireless
management frames, and retransmissions.
In addition to the total count, there are also separate counts for
frames according to the priority queue to which they were routed
(Low, Mid, or High).
If the ACSE Option is enabled, then the Low, Mid and High counts
are for data frames only and there is an additional counter for voice
(RTP) frames. The voice frames count includes fax frames. This is
true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells
where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice
count should be 0.
!Frames dropped (too many retries) – Displays the number of
dropped frames. The frames that were retransmitted to the extent of
the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
If the ACSE Option is enabled, then in addition to the total count,
there are also separate counters for total number of data frames and
voice (RTP) frames. The voice frames count includes fax frames. This
is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells
2-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled. In this case the Voice
count should be 0.
!Total retransmitted frames – Displays the total number of
retransmissions of frames (counts all unsuccessful transmissions/
retransmissions).
If the ACSE Option is enabled, then in addition to the total count,
there are also separate counters for total number of Data frames
and Voice (RTP) frames. This is true also for Subscriber Units that
do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option in the AU is
enabled. In this case the Voice count should be 0.
!Total Tx errors – Displays the number of transmit errors that have
occurred. The total number of Tx errors includes transmissions that
were not acknowledged properly, transmissions that were aborted
and transmissions that were delayed for various reasons (e.g. not
enough time until the end of the current dwell period).
In addition, the following special counters are displayed to indicate
the reason for the error:
"H/W: An internal hardware problem in the modem.
"ABR: The transmission was aborted before completion
because of internal problems in the DSP.
"CSL: The transmission was cancelled because the modem
was busy in receiving data.
"ACKTOUT (Acknowledge Timeout): The frame was not
acknowledged within the time defined by the Acknowledge
Delay Limit parameter.
"FAIL: There was an internal timeout in the modem.
"ACKCRC: There was a CRC error in the ACK message.
"RTSC: The RTS was sent but no CTS was received (RTS
collision).
"EOD (End of Dwell): There was not enough time left to
transmit the message
!Total received frames from wireless – Displays the total number
of frames that were received from the wireless media. The count
includes data, control and wireless management frames, including
beacons received from the AU. The count does not include frames
that were discarded internally, bad frames and duplicate frames.
!Total received data frames – Displays the total number of data
frames received from the wireless media, including duplicate frames
(see Duplicate frames discarded, below). In addition to the total
count, there are also separate counts for data frames according to
the receive priority queue to which they were routed (Low or High).
!Bad fragments received – Displays the number of frames received
from the wireless media with errors (CRC errors).
Menus and Parameters 2-15
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!Duplicate frames discarded – Displays the number of frames
discarded due to receiving multiple copies. If an acknowledge
message was not received by the originating unit, the same data
frame can be properly received twice (or more). Although duplicate
frames are included in all counters that count data frames, only the
first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port.
!Internally discarded MIR/CIR – Displays the number of data
frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the
MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum allowed
information rate.
Voice Statistics (SU with Voice
Support Only)
The voice statistics counters display information concerning voice and
fax traffic, including T.38 redundant fax traffic. The displayed
information includes the accumulated numbers since the last reset for
transmitted and received RTP frames and bytes.
!Display Counters – Displays the current value of the following voice
counters.
"Voice Frames Transmitted
"Voice Frames Received
"Voice Bytes Transmitted
"Voice Bytes Received
!Reset Counters – Resets the voice counters.
Per Hop Statistics (AU and SU)
The Per Hop Statistics provide information on performance of the
wireless signal at different hopping frequencies. The Per Hop Statistics
menu includes the following options:
!Display Counters – Displays the continuously updated statistics.
!Reset Counters – Resets the Per Hop Statistics counters.
The Display Counters option displays various statistics for each of the
hopping frequencies. In addition, it displays some general wireless link
performance statistics.
2-16 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
The Rx, Tx and RTx per hop counters accumulate the number of
applicable frames since last reset. The counters can also be reset using
the Reset Counters option in either the Per Hop Statistics menu or in
the Traffic Counters menu.
The general rate (Frames per second) statistics is the average rate
during the last 64 hops.
The display is continuously updated. Press any key to exit.
Ping Test (AU, SU and GU)
The Ping Test menu includes the following options:
!Destination IP Address – Displays the IP address of the destination
unit for pinging. Allows entering an IP address (4 x 3 digit octets,
separated by dots).
The default IP address is 192.000.000.001.
!No. of Pings – Enter the number of ping attempts per session.
The allowed range is from 0 to 9999. Select 0 for continuous
pinging.
The default value is 1.
!Ping Frame Length – Enter the ping packet size.
The allowed range is from 60 to 1472 bytes.
The default value is 64 bytes.
!Ping Frame Timeout – Enter the ping frame timeout, which is the
amount of time (in ms) to wait between ping attempts.
The allowed range is from 200 to 60000 ms, in increments of 200
milliseconds (200, 400, 600,……60000).
The default value is 200 ms.
Num The number of the information row, assigned automatically and
sequentially by the program.
Freq The hopping frequency, according to the hopping sequence.
Rx The accumulated number of frames received at the specified
frequency since last reset.
Tx The accumulated number of frames transmitted successfully at
the specified frequency since last reset.
RTx The accumulated number of frames re-transmitted at the
specified frequency since last reset.
avrDBM
(avrRSSI) The average RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) in dBm
or RSSI units (according to the RSSI Display Option) of all the
frames received at the specified frequency since the last reset. If
no frames have been received, the avrRSSI is NA (Not
Available).
Menus and Parameters 2-17
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!Start Sending – Starts transmission of ping frames.
!Stop Sending – Stops the transmission of ping frames. The test will
end automatically once the number of pings that were sent have
reached the value specified in the No. of Pings parameter (described
above). The Stop Sending option can be used to end the test before
completing the specified number of pings, or if continuous pinging
was selected.
!Show Ping Test Values – To display the current values of the ping
test parameters, the transmission status (sending or not), the
number of pings sent, and the number of pings received
(acknowledged frames).
Continuous Link Quality Display
(Available in SU Only)
This option displays a continuously updated table that includes
information on the quality of the received signal (Received Signal
Strength Indication or RSSI). Press any key to abort the test.
Each line includes the number of frames that were received since the
last measurement (total Rx), the average RSSI in dBm or RSSI units
(according to the RSSI Display Option) for these frames (avrDBM/
avrRSSI) and the Error rate (number of retransmitted frames in the last
100 transmitted frames).
The Error rate is meaningful only when there is traffic from the SU to
the AU. It is recommended to use the Ping Test (see page 2-16) with a
Ping Frame Length of 1472 bytes.
MAC Address Database (Available
in AU Only)
The MAC Address Database displays information on the subscriber
units associated with the AU as well as bridging (forwarding)
information. The following options are available:
!Display Bridging & Association Info – Displays a list of all the
Subscriber Units and stations in the Forwarding Database of the
AU. For stations behind an SU, the SU’s MAC address is also
displayed.
Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, as follows:
"Et (Ethernet): Addresses that have been learned from the
Ethernet port.
"Vp (Virtual port): Addresses of the nodes behind an
associated SU. For these addresses, the address of the SU is
displayed in parenthesis.
2-18 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
"St (Static): An associated SU. These entries also include the
SW Version of the SU.
"Sp (Special): 5 Addresses that always exist:
#The MAC address of the AU (appears twice as it is learned
from both the Ethernet and the wireless ports)
#Alvarion’s Multicast address (01:20:D6:00:00:01, also
twice). The system handles this address as a Broadcast
address.
#The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF)
In addition, a summary table displays information about the
Forwarding Database (Bridging Info), the Associated Subscriber
Units Database (Association Info) and the Subscriber Units that are
currently conducting a voice call (Call Info). For each of these
databases, the displayed information includes:
#The current number of entries. The number of entries in
the Bridging Info includes the Et (Ethernet) and the Vp
(Virtual ports) entries. The number of entries in the
Association Info includes the associated units.
#The aging time specified for entries in these tables (the
defaults are 300 seconds for the Bridge Aging Time, No
Aging for the Association Aging Time and 1800 seconds
for the Call Info table).
#The maximum allowed number of entries for these tables
(1019 for the Bridging Info and as specified by the
Maximum Number of Associations parameter for the
Association Info and the Call Info. The default value of the
Maximum Number of Associations is 512).
!Display Association Info – Displays details of the associated SUs.
Each entry in the list includes the following information:
"The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit
"The Maximum Data Rate of the SU.
"The average level of RF signals received from the Subscriber
Unit.
"The wireless status of the SU. There are three options:
#Associated
NOTE:
There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU will be removed
from the associations database only upon occurrence of any of the following:
(1) The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC
address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU, or
(2) The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to
acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it.
Menus and Parameters 2-19
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
#Authenticated
#Not Authenticated (a temporary status)
"The SW version of the SU.
!Display CIR/MIR Info: Displays details of the CIR/MIR parameters
of the associated SUs. Each entry in the list includes the following
information:
"The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit
"The SW version of the SU.
"MIR/CIR info for the SU:
#CIR Tx (SU to AU)
#MIR Tx (SU to AU)
#CIR Rx (AU to SU)
#MIR Rx (AU to SU)
#Max. Delay.
Per-rate Counters (AU and SU)
Resets or displays the per-rate counters. The per-rate counters display
the number of frames (excluding retransmissions) transmitted since the
last reset at each of the rates (1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3 Mbps) and the total
number of frames that were retransmitted at each of the rates. In the
Message Direction Status in AU
SU Scanning
Probe Request
(including ESSID) - Scanning SU → AU -
Probe Response (only if correct ESSID in
Probe Request) AU → SU -
SU Synchronized
Authentication Request SU → AU Not Authenticated
Challenge Text AU → SU Not Authenticated
Challenge Text Encrypted SU → AU Not Authenticated
Authentication Successful AU → SU Authenticated
SU Authenticated
Association Request SU → AU Authenticated
Association Successful AU → SU Associated
ACK SU → AU Associated
Data Traffic SU ↔ AU Associated
2-20 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
AU the information is provided for each of the associated SUs, identified
by their MAC address. The counters in the AU are reset when there is a
new association with an SU (including reassociations).
RSSI Display Option (AU and SU)
In BreezeACCESS units running SW versions 3.X and below, all
measurements of received RF signal levels are displayed using arbitrary
RSSI units. From version 4.0 onward, the conventional dBm
measurement units can be used. However, to support users that prefer
to continue using RSSI units, the RSSI Display dBm option selects the
measurement units to be used for displaying received signal level
values.
Available selections: dBm, RSSI.
Default selection: RSSI.
Menus and Parameters 2-21
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Advanced Configuration Menu
The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all the
parameters, including the parameters that are available through the
Basic Configuration menu.
The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to the following
menus:
!IP Parameters (AU, SU and GU) (see page 2-21)
!Air Interface Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-22)
!Network Management Parameters (AU, SU and GU) (see page 2-41)
!Bridge Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-43)
!VLAN Parameters (GU) (see page 2-43)
!Performance Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-55)
!Service Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-58)
!Security Parameters (AU and SU) (see page 2-62)
!Voice Parameters (SU with voice support) (see page 2-63)
!Dialing Parameters (SU with voice support) (see page 2-64)
!Telephony Signals Parameters (SU with voice support)
(see page 2-71)
!Hopping Parameters (GU) (see page 2-77)
!Alarm Parameters (GU) (see page 2-78)
IP Parameters (AU, SU and GU)
The IP Parameters sub-menu allows configuration of the following
parameters:
!IP Address – Displays the current IP address of the unit and allows
the entry of a new IP address (four sets of three digits, separated by
dots).
The default IP Address is 010.000.000.001.
!Subnet Mask – Displays the current subnet mask of the unit and
allows entry of a new subnet mask (four sets of three digits,
separated by dots).
The default mask is 255.000.000.000.
!Default Gateway Address – Displays the current address of the
default gateway of the unit and allows entry of a new default
gateway address (four sets of three digits, separated by dots).
The default is 000.000.000.000.
2-22 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!DHCP Client
"DHCP Options – Displays the current status of the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) support, and allows
selecting a new operation mode. The available options are:
#Disable – Use manual procedure for configuring the IP
parameters.
#DHCP Only – Search for a DHCP Server and obtain the IP
parameters from it (IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Default Gateway Address).
#Automatic – Search for a DHCP Server for configuration
of the IP parameters. If a DHCP Server is not found within
approximately 40 seconds, use the currently configured IP
parameters.
The default is Disable.
"Access to DHCP – To define the port through which the unit
is allowed to communicate with a DHCP server. The options
are:
#From Wlan Only
#From Ethernet Only
#From Both Ethernet & Wlan
The default for an Access Unit is From Ethernet Only. The
default for a Subscriber Unit is From Wlan Only.
!Show IP Parameters – Displays the current values of the IP
Parameters.
Air Interface Parameters (AU and
SU)
Hopping Frequencies Setting Parameters
The process of setting the hopping sequence includes the following
steps:
a. Select the frequencies to be used
b. Define the method of generating the basic hopping sequence based on
the set of selected frequencies. The method of generating the basic
sequence also defines the hopping shift mechanism for generating
different actual hopping sequences.
NOTE:
The Access to DHCP option is not available in the GU, as this module does
not have a wireless link interface.
Menus and Parameters 2-23
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
c. Define a different hopping sequence for each AU in order to minimize
interference between adjacent AUs.
!Hopping Band – Available in units with INT option only. Defines the
method of generating the basic hopping sequence. The available
selections are ISM US FCC, ISM International and Flexible
Hopping Definition.
"ISM US FCC: The basic hopping sequence is as defined in
the IEEE 802.11 standard and shown in Table 2-1. There are
79 hopping frequencies, using channels 2 to 80. (The
channel number is the distance in MHz from the beginning
of the frequency band, so that channel number 2 is at
5727MHz). Synchronization is not supported (Hopping Sync
parameter is set to Idle and cannot be changed).
"ISM International: The basic hopping sequence is as
defined in the IEEE 802.11 standard and shown in Table 2-
1. There are 79 hopping frequencies, using channels 2 to 80.
(The channel number is the distance in MHz from the
beginning of the frequency band, so that channel number 2
is at 5727MHz). Synchronization (Hopping Sync) is
supported.
"Flexible Hopping Definition: The Flexible Hopping
Definition menu should be used to define the basic hopping
sequence.
NOTE:
The same method for generating the basic hopping sequence (and the hopping shift
mechanism) should be used for all units in the system to enable SUs to communicate
with the AUs and to support radio planning that will provide minimal interference
between neighboring sectors.
NOTE:
In units that are configured in the factory to operate only in ISM US FCC hopping
standard (US Option), the Hopping Band menu is not available.
2-24 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Table 2-1: ISM Basic Hopping Sequence
!Flexible Hopping Definition –Adds and removes frequencies to/
from the list of hopping frequencies; displays the selected hopping
frequencies and the current hopping sequence (based on the
previous selections made before the last reset). The new selections
will come into effect only after the next reset.
Index Channel
#Frequency
(MHz) Index Channel
#Frequency
(MHz) Index Channel
#Frequency
(MHz)
1 2 5727 28 5 5730 55 15 5740
2 25 5750 29 39 5764 56 35 5760
3 64 5789 30 12 5737 57 67 5792
4 10 5735 31 36 5761 58 52 5777
5 45 5770 32 68 5793 59 58 5783
6 18 5743 33 9 5734 60 44 5769
7 73 5798 34 70 5795 61 50 5775
8 49 5774 35 77 5802 62 17 5742
9 21 5746 36 6 5731 63 7 5732
10 63 5788 37 62 5787 64 19 5744
11 78 5803 38 29 5754 65 8 5733
12 31 5756 39 14 5739 66 69 5794
13 61 5786 40 27 5752 67 51 5776
14 24 5749 41 16 5741 68 42 5767
15 54 5779 42 59 5784 69 3 5728
16 65 5790 43 43 5768 70 30 5755
17 28 5753 44 76 5801 71 57 5782
18 79 5804 45 34 5759 72 37 5762
19 33 5758 46 72 5797 73 55 5780
20 4 5729 47 11 5736 74 26 5751
21 20 5745 48 60 5785 75 46 5771
22 13 5738 49 80 5805 76 53 5778
23 38 5763 50 47 5772 77 40 5765
24 74 5799 51 22 5747 78 32 5757
25 56 5781 52 75 5800 79 48 5773
26 71 5796 53 66 5791
27 23 5748 54 41 5766
Menus and Parameters 2-25
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The default sequence (including the case where all frequencies were
deleted) is the single lowest available frequency – 5725 MHz.
"Add Frequencies – Adds discrete hopping frequencies or
frequency ranges. Enter a list of frequencies and/or
frequency ranges to be added, e.g. 5725-5735, 5740, 5744.
Use a comma to separate between entries (no spaces). The
allowed entries are from 5725 to 5875 in steps of 1 MHz.
"Remove Frequencies - Removes frequencies from the
existing list. Enter a list of frequencies and/or frequency
ranges to be removed, using the same guidelines as in Add
Frequencies above. When a frequency range is removed, all
frequencies in the range that are included in the list of
frequencies to be used, are removed, including the
frequencies that define the range boundaries.
"Erase All – Erases all the entries from the list.
"Scrambling Definition – Defines the method of organizing
the selected frequencies to form the actual hopping sequence
to be used. Proper organization of the hopping sequence is
essential to guarantee minimal cross interference among
several collocated AUs that use the same sequence with
different Hopping Shift values.
#Scrambling Mode – Defines the scrambling mode. The
following options are available:
•Standard Scrambling – This mode is not recommended
for sequences with 7 or more channels. The scrambled
basic sequences for 3 to 6 frequencies when using
Standard Scrambling are:
Table 2-2: Basic Sequences using Standard Scrambling
Frequency 1 (index=1) is the lowest frequency in the list
of frequencies to be used, frequency 2 is the next
frequency and so on.
•Manual Scrambling – For customized definition of the
hopping sequence, using the Manual Sequence
Definition option (see below).
•Enhanced Scrambling – Automatically generates
hopping sequences using an enhanced algorithm. It is
recommended that Enhanced Scrambling rather then
Standard Scrambling be used. If the Enhanced
Scrambling Mode is selected, the Spanning Factor
N (number of channels) Scrambled Basic Sequence (channel indexes)
31, 3, 2
41, 3, 2, 4
51, 3, 5, 2, 4
61, 3, 5, 2, 6, 4
2-26 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
parameter (see below) must be configured in the AU. The
Enhanced Mode is not suitable for sequences with 6 or
less frequencies. If Enhanced Scrambling is selected with
sequences that have 6 or less frequencies, than
Standard Scrambling is used by default.
The scrambled sequence is generated according to the
following rules:
a.The first channel in the basic scrambled sequence is
frequency 1 (Frequency 1 (index=1) is the lowest
frequency in the list of frequencies to be used, frequency
2 is the next frequency and so on.)
b.The index of each of the other channels is calculated
by adding the Spanning Factor to the index of the
previous channel. Note that the sequence is cyclic,
meaning that adding 1 to the highest index in the
sequence (Index=N where N is the number of channels in
the sequence) will result in the first channel (Index=1).
The scrambled basic sequence can also be calculated
using the following formula:
Px (j)= {[(j-1)*X]mod(N)}+1
Where:
X is the Spanning Factor
N is the number of channels in the sequence (modulus)
J is the sequence index
Example: N=8, X=3
P1(5)={[(1-1)*3}mod8}+1=1
P2(5)={[(2-1)*3}mod8}+1=6
P3(5)={[(3-1)*3}mod8}+1=3
P4(5)={[(4-1)*3}mod8}+1=8
P5(5)={[(5-1)*3}mod8}+1=5
P6(5)={[(6-1)*3}mod8}+1=2
P7(5)={[(7-1)*3}mod8}+1=7
P8(5)={[(8-1)*3}mod8}+1=4
And the basic scrambled sequence is:
1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6.
#Manual Sequence Definition – Manually defines the
hopping sequence, using numbered channel indexes (from
1 to “Number of Hopping Frequencies”). The sequence
length must be equal to “Number of Hopping Frequencies”
(all the defined frequencies must be used).
#Erase Manual Sequence – Erases the manually defined
hopping sequence.
Menus and Parameters 2-27
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
#Spanning Factor (AU only) – Defines the Spanning
Factor to be used by the Enhanced Scrambling
mechanism. The Spanning Factor should be chosen so
that the GCD (Greater Common Divisor) of the Spanning
Factor and the Number of Hopping Frequencies would
be 1 (e.g. for 8 frequencies possible values for the
Spanning Factor are 1, 3, 5 and 7). The SU learns the
value of the Spanning Factor from the AU during the
association process.
Use of different spanning factors by non-synchronized
neighboring base stations reduces the probability of
interference between adjascent sectors.
Valid values: 1 to Number of Hopping Frequencies minus
1, provided it meets the GCD requirement as described
above.
It is not recommended to use spanning factors of 1 and
N-1, as they result in hopping on consecutive channel
(assuming that the available channels are consecutive). In
these cases the advantage of using frequency hopping is
not fully utilized, since a narrow band interference may
affect several consecutive hops. Spanning factors of 2 and
N-2 also result in a relatively poor spread of the hopping
frequencies over the available frequency band.
Default Value: 1
"Show Flexible Hopping Parameters – Displays the
following information:
#An updated list of the defined sub-bands and discrete
frequencies to become effective after the next reset. A sub-
band is defined by the first and last hopping frequency in
a series of consecutive frequencies, with 3MHz separation
between frequencies.
#An updated list of all the hopping frequencies to be used
after the next reset.
#Scrambling Mode
#Manual Sequence Definition (if applicable)
#Spanning Factor (if applicable. In the SU it will be shown
only when operating in the Enhanced Scrambling mode)
#The current sequence of operational hopping frequencies
NOTE:
During the association process, the SU learns the Scrambling Mode
(and the Spanning Factor if applicable) of the AU. If the Scrambling
Mode of the AU is different from the one configured for the SU, than
after completing the association process the SU will use the
Scrambling Mode of the AU.
2-28 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!Hopping Shift –Displays the current Hopping Shift parameter and
allows entry of a new value. Available only in AUs. All the associated
SUs learn the value of the Hopping Shift parameter from the AU
during the association process. The Hopping Shift parameter is
used to provide different operational hopping sequences when
several co-located Access Units use the same set of hopping
frequencies and the same scrambling method (and hence the same
basic hopping sequence). Correct selection of different hopping shift
values for adjascent AUs will minimize the cross interference
among these AUs and will allow for better spectrum utilization.
When setting this parameter, consider the following relationship:
Max. Hopping Shift (channels) = Number of hopping frequencies-1.
The method of using the Hopping Shift for generating the actual
hopping sequences depends on the method used for defining the
basic hopping sequence: ISM Standard Sequence, Standard
Scrambling, Enhanced Scrambling or Manual Sequence Definition.
"ISM Hopping Sequence:
If ISM US FCC or ISM International hopping standard is
used, the shift operation is performed on the channels
(frequencies) of the basic hopping sequence. The actual
hopping channel (frequency) is calculating by adding the
value of the Hopping Shift to the channel (frequency) of the
basic hopping sequence. Note that the sequence is cyclic,
meaning that adding 1 to channel 80 which is the highest
channel, will result in channel 2 which is the lowest channel
in the sequence. See Table 2-3 for an example of the actual
hopping sequence with a hopping shift of 3.
When using the ISM hopping standard, it is recommended
that the difference in the values of the hopping shifts used
by the units in any two adjacent sectors will be 3 (e.g. 0, 3,
6, …) to minimize cross interference.
Menus and Parameters 2-29
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 2-3: ISM Hopping Sequence, Hopping Shift=3
"Enhanced Scrambling mode:
In this mode the shift operation is performed on the channel
indexes. The actual hopping channel is calculated by
increasing the indexes of the basic hopping sequence by the
value of the Hopping Shift. Note that the sequence is cyclic,
meaning that adding 1 to the highest index in the sequence
Index Channel
#Frequency
(MHz) Index Channel
#Frequency
(MHz) Index Channel
#Frequency
(MHz)
1 5 5730 28 8 5733 55 18 5743
2 28 5753 29 42 5767 56 38 5763
3 67 5792 30 15 5740 57 70 5795
4 13 5738 31 39 5764 58 55 5780
5 48 5773 32 71 5796 59 61 5786
6 21 5746 33 12 5737 60 47 5772
7 76 5801 34 73 5798 61 53 5778
8 52 5777 35 80 5805 62 20 5745
9 24 5749 36 9 5734 63 10 5735
10 66 5791 37 65 5790 64 22 5747
11 2 5727 38 32 5757 65 11 5736
12 34 5759 39 17 5742 66 72 5797
13 64 5789 40 30 5755 67 54 5779
14 27 5752 41 19 5744 68 45 5770
15 57 5782 42 62 5787 69 6 5731
16 68 5793 43 46 5771 70 33 5758
17 31 5756 44 79 5804 71 60 5785
18 3 5728 45 37 5762 72 40 5765
19 36 5761 46 75 5800 73 58 5783
20 7 5732 47 14 5739 74 29 5754
21 23 5748 48 63 5788 75 49 5774
22 16 5741 49 4 5729 76 56 5781
23 41 5766 50 50 5775 77 43 5768
24 77 5802 51 25 5750 78 35 5760
25 59 5784 52 78 5803 79 51 5776
26 74 5799 53 69 5794
27 26 5751 54 44 5769
2-30 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
(Index=N where N is the number of channels in the
sequence) will result in the first channel (Index=1).
Example: Enhanced Scrambling, N=8, Spanning Factor=3:
Table 2-4: Hopping Shift Implementation, Enhanced Scrambling (N=8, Spanning
Factor=3)
If for example the defined hopping frequencies are 5730,
5740, 5750, 5760, 5770, 5780, 5790, 5800, then the
frequencies of the actual hopping sequences are:
Table 2-5: Actual Hopping sequences, Enhanced Scrambling (N=8, Spanning
Factor=3)
The following formula can be used for calculating the actual
hopping sequence:
PS(j)={[P0(j)+S-1]mod(N)}+1
Where:
S=Hopping Shift
Hopping Shift Actual Sequence Indexes
0 (basic sequence) 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6
12, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1, 4, 7
23, 6, 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8
34, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1
45, 8, 3, 6, 1, 4, 7, 2
56, 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3
67, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1, 4
78, 3, 6, 1, 4, 7, 2, 5
Hopping
Shift Hop#1 Hop#2 Hop#3 Hop#4 Hop#5 Hop#6 Hop#7 Hop#8
05730 5760 5790 5740 5770 5800 5750 5780
15740 5770 5800 5750 5780 5730 5760 5790
25750 5780 5730 5760 5790 5740 5770 5800
35760 5790 5740 5770 5800 5750 5780 5730
45770 5800 5750 5780 5730 5760 5790 5740
55780 5730 5760 5790 5740 5770 5800 5750
65790 5740 5770 5800 5750 5780 5730 5760
75800 5750 5780 5730 5760 5790 5740 5770
Menus and Parameters 2-31
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
N=number of channels in the sequence (modulus)
P0(j)=Channel no. j in the basic sequence (shift=0)
PS(j)=Channel no. j in the actual sequence with hopping
shift S
Example: The basic hopping sequence is 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6
(Enhanced Scrambling, N=8, Spanning Factor=3).
The actual hopping sequence for a hopping shift of 3 is:
P3(1)=[1+3-1]mod8+1=4
P3(2)=[4+3-1]mod8+1=7
P3(3)=[7+3-1]mod8+1=2
P3(4)=[2+3-1]mod8+1=5
P3(5)=[5+3-1]mod8+1=8
P3(6)=[8+3-1]mod8+1=3
P3(7)=[3+3-1]mod8+1=6
P3(8)=[6+3-1]mod8+1=1
The actual hopping sequence indexes are:
4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6, 1
Standard and Manual Scrambling:
In these modes the shift operation is performed on the
sequence elements. The basic sequence is shifted cyclically
according to the value of the Hopping Shift parameter, so
that element no. i in the actual sequence equals element
number i+s in the basic sequence, where s is the hopping
shift. Thus, if the basic sequence is a, b, c, d, e, f then a shift
of 1 will result in the sequence b, c, d, e, f, a,; a shift of 2 will
result in the sequence c, d, e, f, a, b; and so forth.
Example: Standard Scrambling, N=6
Table 2-6: Hopping Shift Implementation, Standard Scrambling (N=6)
If the defined frequencies are 5730, 5740, 5750, 5760, 5770,
5780, then the frequencies of the actual hopping sequences
are:
Hopping Shift Actual Sequence
0 (basic sequence) 1, 3, 5, 2, 6, 4
13, 5, 2, 6, 4, 1
25, 2, 6, 4, 1, 3
32, 6, 4, 1, 3, 5
46, 4, 1, 3, 5, 2
54, 1, 3, 5, 2, 6
2-32 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Table 2-7: Actual Hopping sequences, Standard Scrambling (N=6)
The following formula can be used to calculate the actual
hopping sequence:
P S(i)=P0[(i+s-1)mod(N)+1]
Where:
S is the hopping shift
N=number of channels in the sequence (modulus)
P S(i) is element number i in the actual sequence with
hopping shift s
P0(i) is element number in the basic hopping sequence
(s=0).
For example, in the basic sequence sequence with N=6:
P0(1) =1
P0 (2)=3
P0 (3)=5
P0 (4)=2
P0 (5)=6
P0 (6)=4
For a shift of 3, the actual sequence is:
P3(1) =P0 [(1+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(4)=2
P3(2) =P0 [(2+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(5)=6
P3(3) =P0 [(3+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(6)=4
P3(4) =P0 [(4+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(1)=1
P3(5) =P0 [(5+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(2)=3
P3(6) =P0 [(6+3-1)mod6+1]=P0(3)=5
And the actual hopping sequence is 2, 6, 4, 1, 3, 5.
The allowed range for the Hopping shift parameter is from 0
to N-1, where N is the number of hopping frequencies.
The default is 0.
Hopping shift Hop#1 Hop#2 Hop#3 Hop#4 Hop#5 Hop#6
05730 5750 5770 5740 5780 5760
15750 5770 5740 5780 5760 5730
25770 5740 5780 5760 5730 5750
35740 5780 5760 5730 5750 5770
45780 5760 5730 5750 5770 5740
55760 5730 5750 5770 5740 5780
Menus and Parameters 2-33
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!Hopping Sync (BS-AU only) –Displays the current Hopping Sync
status of the unit and allows defining a new status. When several
AUs that use the same hopping set and different hopping sequences
are co-located, their operation should be synchronized in terms of
hopping sequence initialization and timing. If a BS-GU GPS module
is not used for synchronization, then one AU must be specified as a
Master unit and all other units must be specified as Slave units.
When a BS-GU is used, all AUs must be configured to Slave mode.
Available options are:
"Idle – No synchronization (stand-alone operation)
"Master – The AU that serves as a Master unit providing
synchronization signals to the Slave units
"Slave – An AU that operates as a Slave
The default is Idle.
ESSID Parameters
The ESSID is a string used to identify a wireless network. It prevents the
unintentional merging of two co-located wireless networks. An SU can
only associate with an AU that has an identical ESSID. To facilitate easy
additions of SUs to existing deployments, where different ESSIDs are
used in neighboring sectors, a secondary “global” ESSID, namely
Operator ESSID, is available in the AU.
!ESSID – The ESSID (Extended Service Set ID) of the unit. Use
different ESSIDs to segment the wireless access network and add
security to your network.
Valid values: A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case
sensitive.
The default value is ESSID1.
!Operator ESSID Parameters (AU only) – The Operator ESSID is a
secondary ESSID that can only be configured in the AU. The
Operator ESSID can be used to enhance flexibility and reduce
configuration effort when adding new Subscriber Units to
operational installations in which different ESSIDs were configured
for different sectors that actually belong to the same network. In
such installations, all AUs should be configured with the same
NOTE:
Synchronization is not allowed by the radio regulations in certain countries. In units
using the ISM US FCC hopping standard, the Hopping Sync option is not
supported.
WARNING:
When using a GPS system for synchronization, all AUs in the chassis must be set
to Slave.
2-34 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Operator ESSID. The ESSID as well as the Operator ESSID are
included in the AU’s Beacon & Probe Response management frames.
The SU shall regard such frames if the ESSID or Operator ESSID
matches its own ESSID. The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is
associated is defined as the Run-Time ESSID, to be used by the SU
when communicating with the AU. The Run-Time ESSID is included
in the list displayed upon selecting either Show Air Interface
Parameters or Show Basic Parameters options in the SU.
In new installations where all units are configured with the same
ESSID, Operator ESSID need not be used.
The following parameters are available:
"Operator ESSID Option – Enables/disables the use of the
Operator ESSID when communicating with SUs.
The default is Enable.
"Operator ESSID – Defines the Operator ESSID.
Valid values: a string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters,
case sensitive.
The default value is ESSID1.
Best AU Selection Parameters
In BreezeACCESS systems with software version 3.0 and below an SU
can associate with any AU it can communicate with, provided they both
use the same ESSID. An SU that can communicate with more than one
AU using the same ESSID becomes associated with the first AU it
“finds”, not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of
communication or other factors such as number of SUs serviced by
each AU. The same limitation also exists if only one AU in the
neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU, since it
is not always necessarily the best choice.
The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing. Changes
in base station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to
create substantial changes in SU performance. The quest for load
sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for
the SU created the need for the Best AU feature, to enable a SU to
connect to the best AU in its neighborhood.
When the Best AU feature is used, each of the AUs are given a quality
mark based on the level at which it is received by the SU. The SU scans
for a configured number of cycles, gathering information from all the
AUs it can communicate with. At the end of the scanning period, the SU
reachs a Best AU decision according to the information gathered. The
AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU
will immediately try to associate with it.
The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is
received by the SU.
Menus and Parameters 2-35
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a
specific AU as the preferred AU.
!Best AU Parameters in SU
"Best AU Support – Enables or disables the Best AU selection
feature.
The default is Disable.
"Number of Scanning Attempts – Defines the number of
scanning cycles to be used for gathering information on
neighboring AUs. A higher number may result in a better
decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during
which the SU is not operational.
Valid values: 1 - 255.
Default value: 20.
The scanning time can be calculated based on the following
formula:
Scanning Time (secs) = N * C * 0.019
N = Number of scanning attempts
C = Number of channels in the hopping sequence
0.019 seconds is the time spent on each channel (dwell time)
while in scanning mode.
"Preferred AU MAC Address – Defines a specific AU with
which the SU should associate. Gaining control of the SUs
association is a powerful tool in network management. The
Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for
applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU
with whom the SU should associate. To prevent the SU from
associating with the first viable AU it finds, the Best AU
Support mechanism should be enabled. Once the SU has
identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address, it will
associate with it and terminate the scanning process. If the
preferred AU is not found, the SU will associate with an AU
according to the decision reached using the best AU
algorithm.
NOTE:
Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long-term conditions prior to the decision
time, it may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time.
Note also that the decision is done only once during the scanning interval. The decision
may not remain the optimal one for ever. If there are significant changes in deployment
of neighboring AUs and the SUs served by them, overall performance may be improved
if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to re-initiate the Best AU decision
process.
NOTE:
If the Best AU feature is not used, the SU associates with the first AU it finds
whose ESSID or Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID.
2-36 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Valid values: MAC address string
The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is
00-00-00-00-00-00 (12 zeros), meaning that there is no
preferred AU.
"Show Best AU Parameters and Data – Displays the
applicable information:
#Neighboring AU Data table - Displayed for each AU that
the unit can communicate with the following parameters:
•MAC Address
•Received signal strength – RSSI or dBm
•Mark – The computed quality mark for the AU.
•Full – The association load status of the AU. It is defined
as full if the number of SUs associated with the AU has
reached the maximum allowed according to the value of
the Maximum Number of Associations parameter (see
page 2-38). An AU whose associations load status is full
cannot be selected as the Best AU, even if its’ computed
mark is the highest.
•ESSID – The ESSID of the AU
In addition to the neighboring AU data table, the following
information is displayed:
•Best AU Support
•Preferred AU MAC Address
•Number of Scanning Attempts
•Associated AU MAC Address (the MAC address of the
selected AU)
•Run Time ESSID (the ESSID of the selected AU)
Power Control Parameters
!Transmit Power Control – Controls the relative gain of the Tx
power circuits.
A value of 7 represents the highest transmit power level, which is
the maximum level supported by the specific unit. A lower value
represents a lower transmit power level. The effect of this parameter
on the transmitted power is not linear, since it is affected by the
length (attenuation) of the IF cable.
The allowed range is from 0 to 7.
The default value is 7 (maximum power).
Other Air Interface Parameters
!Maximum Data Rate – Displays the current maximum data rate,
and allows entry of a new value for the maximum data rate.
NOTE:
It is recommended not to change the Transmit Power Control parameter from its
default value in units with HW revision G or earlier.
Menus and Parameters 2-37
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
BreezeACCESS units operate at data rates of 3 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps. Under certain conditions (compatibility reasons or range/
speed trade-off), you may decide to limit the use of higher rates. If
the quality of the link is not good enough, it is recommended to
decrease the value of this parameter (the higher the data rate, the
higher the error rate). Otherwise, there is a high probability that the
unit will have to retransmit many frames several times before
temporarily reducing the data rate (see Number of
Retransmissions to Decrease Rate on page 2-56). A high number
of retransmissions reduces the overall throughput for the selected
SU as well as for all the other SUs served by the same AU. It is
recommended to also configure the Maximum Data Rate
parameter when the Multi-Rate mechanism is enabled, to avoid
unnecessary trials to transmit at higher rates when the probability
of successful transmissions at these rates is low.
The link quality can be estimated based on the RSSI measurement
in the SU, indicating the level at which the SU receives
transmissions from the AU (downlink RSSI). If the measured RSSI is
less than a certain threshold, it is recommended to decrease the
Maximum Data Rate of the SU in accordance with Table 2-8
(including a 3 dB safety margin). For best results it is recommended
to also acquire the RSSI results from the AU, indicating the level at
which the AU receives transmissions from the specific SU (uplink
RSSI), and to use the lower of the two numbers.
The AU learns the Maximum Data Rate used by each SU during the
association process, and uses this rate for transmissions to the
specific SU.
Allowed values are 1, 2, 3 Mbps.
The default value is 3 Mbps.
2-38 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Table 2-8: Recommended Maximum Data Rate
!Acknowledge Delay Limit – Increases the range of the system
through increasing the time that the unit can wait for
acknowledgements. Increasing the range, however, may decrease
the overall performance and achievable network throughput. It
should be increased only to support ranges of over 10 km. If the
range was increased for one SU, it must be increased to the same
value for the AU.
Valid values are: Low (up to 10 km), Medium (up to 20 km) and High
(more than 20 km).
The default setting is Low (up to 10 km).
!Maximum Number of Associations – Defines the upper limit for
the number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the AU,
in order to guarantee the required quality of service to the
customers.
Valid values: 0-512.
Default value: 512.
!WLAN Aging Time (AU only)– Displays the current Call Aging
Time parameter value and configures a new value. The AU
maintains a Call Information database that includes listings of the
SUs that are currently conducting a voice call. This database is used
to determine the number of active voice calls that are managed by
the AU at any given moment, allowing control of the number of
simultaneous voice calls (see Maximum Voice Sessions
parameters). In addition, the AU allocates prioritized channels to the
voice (RTP) packets of SUs included in the Call Information
database.
Maximum Data
Rate 3Mbps 2Mbps 1Mbps
SU-A/E RSSI>-67 dBm -75 dBm<RSSI<-67 dBm RSSI<-75 dBm
NOTE:
There is no aging time for SUs. An SU will be removed from the list of associated SUs
only upon occurrence of any of the following: (1) The AU received from another AU a
SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated
with the other AU, or (2) The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure
to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it.
Thus, the database of associated SUs may include units that are no longer associated
with the AU. If the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum
Number of Associations parameter, additional SUs can not be served by this AU. To
view the current number of associated SUs, use the Display Association Info option
in the MAC Address Database menu. To delete entries of SUs that are no longer active,
the AU must be reset.
Menus and Parameters 2-39
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The SU is deleted from the Call Information database once it sends a
message that the call was terminated. Throughout the voice call, the
SU periodically transmits keep-alive (re-association) messages
approximatly every ten minutes indicating that the call is still on. If
such messages are not received for a period defined by the Call
Aging Time parameter, the following will take place.
a. The AU deletes the SU listing from the Call Information
database assuming that the call was improperly terminated
(e.g. reset or loss of synchronization).
b. For non-ACSE voice calls, a prioritized channel is no
longer allocated to the voice packets (although voice packets
will still get a relatively high priority).
c. ACSE voice calls will be terminated (no slot will be
allocated for the call).
The allowed range for the Call Aging Time parameter is 1 (no aging)
or 2-50,000 seconds. It is recommended to configure a call aging
time of at least 1200 (20 minutes).
The default value is 1800 seconds.
!Maximum Voice Sessions – Applicable only for an AU that provides
services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities. When the ACSE
voice scheduler option is enabled, this parameter is not applicable
and instead the Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions parameter is
used. The value of the Maximum Voice Sessions parameter
specifies the maximum number of simultaneous voice sessions that
can be conducted by the SUs associated with this AU. If the number
of active voice sessions reaches this number, any additional SU
trying to initiate a voice session shall not get a dial tone. As this
value increases, voice quality may deteriorate as more users share
the same bandwidth for voice sessions.
The selection range is from 0 to 50.
The default value is 12.
!Receive Attenuation Control (SU-A/E units) – Displays the
current attenuation introduced into the receiver circuits and allows
entry of a different attenuation value.
The available Receive Attenuation values are 0 dB (no attenuation),
10 dB and 25 dB. The effect of inserting such attenuation in the
receive circuit is equivalent to reducing the level of the received
signal (including both signal and noise) by 2 dB when selecting 10
dB attenuation and 12 dB when selecting 25 dB attenuation.
The default is 0 dB.
NOTE:
A voice session is defined as a voice connection between an SU and an AU. A
session between two SUs that are served by the same AU is counted as two voice
sessions.
2-40 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!ACSE Parameters – The ACSE (Adaptive Circuit Switched
Emulation) Voice Scheduler is a proprietary enhanced air protocol
that provides guaranteed delay and jitter properties for voice
sessions by reserving specific time slots for each active telephone
call. The ACSE Voice Scheduler allows the delivery of high quality
voice, while maintaining the inherent efficiency of statistically
multiplexed packet based networks. If the ACSE Voice Scheduler is
enabled, an AU can support a higher number of good quality voice
sessions. The ACSE Voice Scheduler feature does not affect voice
sessions generated by external equipment and routed via the
Ethernet port of the Subscriber Unit.
"ACSE Option – Applicable only for an AU that provides
services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities. To
enable/disable the ACSE Voice Scheduler protocol. The AU
controls the operation of all the SUs it serves according to
the configured ACSE Option.
The default is Disable.
"Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions – Applicable only for an AU
that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice
capabilities. When the ACSE voice scheduler option is
disabled, this parameter is not applicable and instead the
Maximum Voice Sessions parameter (see page 2-39) is
used. The value of the ACSE Maximum Voice Sessions
parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous
ACSE voice sessions that can be conducted by the SUs
associated with this AU. If the number of active voice
sessions reaches this number, any additional SU trying to
initiate a voice session will not get a dial tone. As this value
increases, voice quality may deteriorate as more users share
the same bandwidth for voice sessions.
The selection range is from 0 to 21.
The default value is 21.
"ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data – The
maximum number of times that a data packet that was not
acknowledged will be retransmitted. When the ACSE Option
is enabled, this parameter overrides the Number Of
Retransmissions parameter (see page 2-55). This parameter
has no effect when the ACSE Option is disabled. This
parameter is applicable to all units in deployment where the
ACSE Option is enabled, including units that do not support
voice, since they are also affected by the use of the ACSE
protocol.
NOTE:
A voice session is defined as a voice connection between an SU and an AU.
A session between two SUs that are served by the same AU is counted as two
voice sessions.
Menus and Parameters 2-41
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Valid values are from 0 (no retransmissions) to 100.
The default value is 6.
"ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice (AU and SU
with voice support) – The maximum number of times that a
voice packet that was not acknowledged will be
retransmitted. When the ACSE Option is enabled, this
parameter overrides the Number Of Retransmissions
parameter. This parameter has no effect when the ACSE
Option is disabled.
Valid values are from 0 (no retransmissions) to 100.
The default value is 30.
"Show ACSE Parameters – Displays the current settings of
all ACSE parameters. The display in the SU includes the
ACSE Option, which is only configurable in the AU. It also
includes the ACSE Dwell Time, which is set to 60
milliseconds.
Network Management Parameters
(AU, SU and GU)
This feature allows protecting the unit from trials of unauthorized
access by defining a set of IP addresses from which management of the
unit (Telnet, TFTP, SNMP, ICMP) is allowed (excluding transmission of
messages generated in the unit such as Traps or Ping Test frames). This
feature also supports the possibility of defining the direction (from the
wireless media or from the wired Ethernet or from both) from which
such access is allowed. The Network Management Parameters menu
includes the following options:
!Access to Network Management – Defines the port through which
the unit can be managed. The options are the following:
"From Wlan Only
"From Ethernet Only
"From Both Ethernet & Wlan
The default selection is From Both Ethernet & Wlan.
!Network Management Filtering – Enables/disables management
filtering. If management filtering is enabled, the unit can only be
managed by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in
the Set Network Management IP Addresses (see next parameter)
that are connected to the unit via the defined port(s). Available
options are:
NOTE:
The Access to Network Management option is not available in the GU, as this module
does not have a wireless link interface.
2-42 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
"Disable – No IP address based filtering
"Activate Management IP Filter On Ethernet Port –
Applicable only if the Access to Network Management
parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or
From Both Ethernet & Wireless Link. The unit can be
managed from the Ethernet port only by stations whose IP
addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network
Management IP Addresses list. If the Access to Network
Management parameter is configured to From Both
Ethernet & Wireless Link, than there is no IP address
based filtering on the wireless port.
"Activate Management IP Filter On Wlan Port – Applicable
only if the Access to Network Management parameter is
configured to either From Wireless Link Only or From Both
Ethernet & Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from
the wireless link port only by stations whose IP addresses
match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP
Addresses list. If the Access to Network Management
parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet & Wireless
Link, then there is no IP-address-based filtering on the
Ethernet port.
"Activate Management IP Filter On Both Ethernet & Wlan
Ports – Applicable with all options of the Access to Network
Management parameter. The unit can be managed from the
port(s) defined by the selected option of the Access to
Network Management parameter only by stations whose IP
addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network
Management IP Addresses list.
The default selection is Disable.
!Set Network Management IP Addresses – Displays the IP
addresses of the stations that can manage the unit (if Network
Management Filtering option was enabled) and allows you to enter
new addresses; up to three IP addresses can be defined.
The default value is 000.000.000.000 for all 3 addresses.
!Delete a Network Management IP Address – Deletes one of the 3
IP address entries from the list of Network Management IP
Addresses.
!Delete All Network Management IP Addresses – Deletes all entries
from the list of Network Management IP Addresses.
!SNMP Traps – Enables/disables transmission of SNMP traps; if this
option is enabled, you can define up to 3 IP addresses of stations to
which SNMP traps are sent.
NOTE:
In the GU only the Disable and Enable Management IP Filtering on Ethernet
Port options are available.
Menus and Parameters 2-43
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
"Send SNMP Traps – Enables/disables sending of SNMP
traps. Available options are:
#Enable Traps Sending
#Disable Traps Sending
The default selection is Disable Traps Sending.
"SNMP Traps IP Destination – Displays the current values of
3 IP addresses that are defined as the trap destinations.
Allows entering a new address (4 groups of 3 digits each,
separated by dots) for each of the 3 entries.
The default of all three SNMP Traps IP Destinations is
000.000.000.000.
"SNMP Traps Community – Defines a new community string
for each of the 3 SNMP Trap IP Destination entries.
Valid strings: Up to 14 ASCII characters, case sensitive.
The default for all 3 entries is public (read-only).
"Show SNMP Traps Parameters – Displays the current
values of the SNMP Traps parameters.
!Show Network Management Parameters – Displays the current
values of the Network Management parameters.
Bridge Parameters (AU, SU and GU)
The Bridge Parameters sub-menu includes the following parameters
sets:
!Virtual LAN (VLAN) parameters
!ToS parameters
!Ethernet Broadcast Filtering parameters
!Other Bridging parameters
VLAN Parameters
!VLAN Support – Defines the parameters that are related to the
VLAN-aware (Virtual LAN-aware) feature of BreezeACCESS units.
Each VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each
other, but cannot communicate with stations belonging to different
VLANs. The VLAN also provides the ability to set traffic priorities for
transmission of certain frames. The information related to the VLAN
is included in the VLAN Tag Header, which is inserted in each frame
between the MAC header and the data. VLAN implementation in
BreezeACCESS units supports frames routing by port information
(i.e. each port is connected to only one VLAN).
The VLAN Support option allows viewing and setting of the
following parameters:
2-44 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
"VLAN ID-Data (SU unit only) – Applicable for Access links
only. Sets the VLAN ID for data frames, identifying the VLAN
to which the unit belongs.
Valid values: 1 to 4094.
Default value: 1.
Frames received from the Wireless link port:
• Only tagged frames with VLAN ID (VID) value equal to
the VLAN ID Data defined in the unit are forwarded to
the Ethernet port.
• The tag headers are removed from the data frames
received from the wireless link prior to transmitting them
on the Ethernet port.
Frames received from the Ethernet port:
• A VLAN data tag is inserted in all untagged frames
received from the Ethernet port before transmission on
the wireless link. The tag includes the values of the VLAN
ID – Data and the VLAN Priority – Data parameters.
• Tagged frames received on Ethernet port which are
designed to be forwarded to the Wireless link port are
discarded (including frames with priority tag for
prioritization purpose only).
"VLAN ID-Management (AU, SU without voice and GU) –
Applicable for all link types. Sets the VLAN ID for
management frames, identifying remote stations for
management purposes. This applies to all management
applications using protocols such as SNMP, TFTP, ICMP
(ping) and Telnet. All the servers/stations using these
protocols must tag the management frames they send to the
unit with the value of the VLAN ID – Management parameter.
Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN).
Default value: 65535.
If VLAN ID – Management is other than 65535:
• Only tagged management frames with matching VLAN ID
received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are
forwarded to the unit.
• A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management
frames generated by the unit before transmission on
either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The tag includes
the values of the VLAN ID – Management and the VLAN
Priority – Management parameters.
If VLAN ID – Management is 65535 (No VLAN):
• Only untagged management frames received on either
Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit.
• Management frames generated by the unit will not be
tagged.
Menus and Parameters 2-45
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The following table summarizes the functionality of the
internal management port in accordance with the value of
the VLAN ID – Management parameter. The table is valid
for all link types.
Table 2-9: Management Port Functionality – AU, SU without Voice Support and GU
Legend: VID-M: VLAN ID-Management
PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management
"VLAN ID-Voice & Management (SU with voice support only)
– Applicable for all link types. Sets the VLAN ID for voice and
management frames, identifying remote stations for voice
communication and management purposes. This applies to
all units that support the H.323 protocol and to
management applications using protocols such SNMP, TFTP,
ICMP (Ping) and Telnet. All the servers/stations using these
protocols must tag the frames they send to the unit with the
value of the VLAN ID - Voice & Management parameter.
Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN).
Default value: 65535.
If VLAN ID –Voice & Management is other than 65535:
• Only tagged management frames with matching VLAN ID
received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are
forwarded to the unit.
• A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management
frames generated by the unit before transmission on
either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The tag includes
the values of the VLAN ID – Voice & Management and
the VLAN Priority – Management parameters.
• A VLAN Voice Tag is inserted in all voice frames (RTP
packets) generated by the unit before transmission to the
Wireless or Ethernet port. The tag includes the values of
the VLAN ID – Voice & Management and the VLAN
Priority – Voice parameters.
If VLAN ID – Voice & Management is 65535 (No VLAN):
• Only untagged management frames received on either
Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit.
• Management frames generated by the unit will not be
tagged.
Action Management Port – internal (SU)
Receive from Ethernet Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when VID-M=65535
Receive from Wireless
(AU and SU) Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when VID-M=65535
Transmit Tag Insert VID-M, PID-M
2-46 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
•If the Voice Priority Tag Option is enabled, a VLAN
Priority Tag is inserted in all voice frames (RTP packets)
generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless
or Ethernet port. The tag includes a VID value of zero
and the VLAN Priority – Voice parameter.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the
internal management and voice ports in accordance with the
value of the VLAN ID – Voice & Management parameter.
The table is valid for all link types. See VLAN Link type –
Access Link and Trunk Link for some restrictions when
configuring this parameter.
Table 2-10: Management and Voice Ports Functionality – SU with Voice Support
Legend: VID-M: VLAN ID - Voice and Management
PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management
PID-V: VLAN Priority-Voice
"VLAN Link Type (AU and SU) – Defines the link type, which
actually defines the functionality of the VLAN-aware
capability of the unit.
Available options are: Hybrid Link, Trunk Link and Access
Link (Access Link is available only in SUs).
The default selection is Hybrid Link.
#Access Link (SU only) – Transfers frames while tagging/
untagging them because all devices connected to it are
VLAN-unaware. Thus, the unit cannot transfer tagged
frames.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the
data port for an access link.
Action Management Port – internal
(SU) Voice RTP Port – internal
(SU with Voice)
Receive from
Ethernet Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when
VID-M=65535
Not applicable
Receive from
Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when
VID-M=65535
Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when
VID-M=65535
Transmit Tag Insert VID-M, PID-M If VID-M = 65535 and Voice Priority
Tag option are enabled, Tag insert
VID=0, PID-V.
If VID-M not equal to 65535, insert
VID-M and PID-V
Menus and Parameters 2-47
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 2-11: VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary – Access Link
Legend: VID-D: VLAN ID-Data
PID-D: VLAN Priority-Data
#Trunk Link – Transfers only tagged frames, because all
devices connected to it are VLAN-aware:
Only tagged data frames received on Ethernet or wireless
link ports are forwarded.
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a received data
frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit’s
VLAN Forwarding List will be discarded.
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU, a WLAN
relayed data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member
of the unit’s VLAN Relaying List will be discarded.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the
data port for a Trunk link.
Action Data Port (SU)
Accept from Ethernet Untagged frames
Accept from Wireless Tagged frames, matching VID-D
Tag Insert VID-D, PID-D (to wireless)
Tag Remove Yes (to Ethernet)
WARNING:
It is not recommended to configure a unit as a Trunk Link with
VLAN ID - Management (or VLAN ID - Voice & Management) of 65535, as it
will not forward any ‘NO VLAN’ management frames to its other port. It will be
impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also
configured with ‘NO VLAN’.
NOTE:
If VLAN Forwarding is enabled, make sure to include in the Forwarding
List the VLAN ID – Management (or VLAN ID - Voice & Management)
of all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit.
NOTE:
If VLAN Relaying is enabled and you manage your devices from behind
an SU unit, make sure to include in the Relaying List the VLAN ID –
Management (or VLAN ID - Management & Voice) of all units that
should be managed when relaying via the wireless port of the AU unit.
If also VLAN Forwarding is enabled in the AU, these VLAN IDs should
also be included in the Forwarding List.
2-48 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Table 2-12: VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary – Trunk Link
#Hybrid Link – Transfers both tagged and untagged
frames, since the devices connected to it can be either
VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware. This is equivalent to
defining no VLAN support, as the unit is transparent to
VLAN.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the
data port for an Hybrid link:
Table 2-13: VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary– Hybrid Link
"Voice Priority Tag Option (SU with voice support only) –.
Supports priority for voice frames (RTP packets) in units with
VLAN ID – Management & Voice of 65535 (No VLAN). If
enabled, a Priority Tag that includes the value of the VLAN
Priority – Voice parameter and a zero value in the VID field
will be inserted into all voice frames (RTP packets) generated
by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet
port.
Valid selections are: Enable and Disable.
Default selection is Disable.
"VLAN Forwarding (AU and SU)– Applicable for trunk link
only. Defines the VLAN ID values that will be included in the
VLAN Forwarding List. If the VLAN Link Type is defined as a
Action Data Port
(SU and AU)
Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames.
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values
which are included in the Forwarding list are forwarded.
Accept from Wireless Tagged frames.
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with VLAN ID values
which are included in the Forwarding list are forwarded.
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
Action Data Port
(SU and AU)
Accept from Ethernet All
Accept from Wireless All
Tag Insert No
Tag Remove No
Menus and Parameters 2-49
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Trunk Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a
received data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of
the unit’s VLAN Forwarding List will be discarded. The VLAN
Forwarding parameter provides the following options:
#VLAN Forwarding Support – Enables or disables the
VLAN Forwarding feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
The default selection is Disable.
#Add Forwarding VLAN ID – Adds a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Forwarding List. One VLAN ID can be entered each time.
The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN
Forwarding List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
#Remove Forwarding VLAN ID – Removes a VLAN ID from
the VLAN ID Forwarding List.
Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are
included in the VLAN Forwarding List.
#Show VLAN ID Forwarding List – Displays the values of
the VLAN IDs that are included in the VLAN Forwarding
List.
"VLAN Relaying (AU only) – Applicable for Trunk link only.
Defines the VLAN ID values that will be included in the VLAN
Relaying List. If the Link Type is defined as Trunk Link and
the VLAN Relaying option is enabled, a received wireless link
relayed frame (a frame received from the wireless link that
should be transmitted back through the wireless link) with a
VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit’s VLAN Relaying
List, will be discarded. If VLAN Forwarding Support is also
enabled, it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the
Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the
relaying operation.
The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options:
#VLAN Relaying Support – Enables or disables the VLAN
Relaying feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
The default selection is Disable.
#Add Relaying VLAN ID – Adds a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Relaying List. One VLAN ID can be entered each time.
NOTE:
If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is
enabled, then all data frames will be discarded.
2-50 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying
List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
#Remove Relaying VLAN ID – Removes a VLAN ID from
the VLAN ID Relaying List.
Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are
included in the VLAN Relaying List.
#Show VLAN ID Relaying List – Displays the values of the
VLAN IDs that are included in the VLAN Relaying List.
"VLAN Traffic Priority (AU and SU) – Each packet to be
transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three
queues: Low, Mid and High. Packets in the High queue have
the highest priority for transmission, and those in the Low
queue have the lowest priority.
BreezeACCESS Subscriber and Access Units support Layer
2 traffic prioritization based on the IEEE 802.1p standard.
The priority field in the 802.1Q header tag can have a value
in the range 0-7. This value determines the relative priority
of the packet.
Tagged frames that are received from the Ethernet port and
have a Priority higher than the value of the VLAN Priority
Threshold will be routed to the Mid queue.
As the system also supports Layer 3 prioritization based on
ToS, packets with precedence in the ToS field that is higher
than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter
will also be routed to the Mid queue (applicable to both
tagged and untagged frames).
All other packets received from the Ethernet port will be
routed to the Low queue.
Voice frames (RTP packets) generated by SUs with voice
support as well as control and wireless management frames
that are generated in the unit will be routed to the High
queue.
Any frame coming from the Ethernet port which is designed
to reach another BreezeACCESS unit via the wireless port
will be sent to the High queue, regardless of the configured
Priority options.
NOTE:
If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is
enabled, then all wireless link relayed data frames will be discarded.
If the VLAN ID Relaying List and Forwarding List Support are both enabled,
all the VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in
the Forwarding List.
Menus and Parameters 2-51
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The VLAN Traffic Priority menu allows viewing and setting
the following parameters:
#VLAN Priority – Data (SU only) – Applicable for Access
link only. Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority
field for data frames that are transmitted to the wireless
link. All data frames are routed to the Low queue. This
parameter will only impact the way that other VLAN-
aware devices will handle the packet.
Valid values are 0-7.
The default value is 0.
#VLAN Priority – Management (AU, SU and GU)– Displays
and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for
management frames in units with a VLAN ID-
Management (or VLAN ID – Management & Voice) value
other than 65535. In the unit all management frames are
routed to the High queue. This parameter only impacts
the way that other VLAN-aware devices will handle the
packet.
Valid values are 0-7.
The default value is 4 for SU units with voice support and
0 for all other units.
#VLAN Priority – Voice (SU with voice support only) –
Applicable for all link types. Displays and sets the value of
the VLAN Priority field for voice frames (RTP packets). In
the unit all voice frames (RTP packets) are routed to the
High queue. This parameter only impacts the way that
other VLAN-aware devices will handle the packet. In units
with VLAN ID – Voice & Management of 65535 (No VLAN),
if the Voice Priority Tag Option enabled, then a Priority
Tag that includes the value of the VLAN Priority – Voice
parameter and a zero value in the VID field will be
inserted into all voice frames (RTP packets) generated by
the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet
port.
Valid values are 0-7.
The default value is 6.
#VLAN Priority Threshold (AU and SU) – Applicable for
trunk and hybrid links only. Displays and defines the
value of the VLAN Priority Threshold. This parameter
impacts the way that the unit will handle tagged packets
that are received from the Ethernet port.
NOTE:
Packets Received from the Ethernet port with a ToS Precedence value higher
than the ToS Precedence Threshold defined will be routed to the Mid queue.
2-52 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Since the system supports both Layer 2 and Layer 3
prioritization, a frame will be routed to the Mid queue if
one of the following conditions is met:
a. The precedence in the ToS field is higher than the value
of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter (applicable to
both tagged and untagged frames).
b. The VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame is higher than
the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter.
Valid values are 0-7.
The default value is 4.
"Show VLAN Parameters – Displays the current values of the
VLAN Support parameters.
ToS Priority Parameters (AU and SU)
!ToS Priority – To set voice priority parameters to support
end-to-end IPv4 Type of Service (ToS) Layer 3 prioritization
according to RFC 791. The ToS Priority menu includes the following
parameters:
"Voice Packets ToS (SU with voice support only) – Sets the
value of the Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header of
voice frames (RTP packets). If the router/gateway in the base
stations supports quality of service based on IPv4 ToS, the
value of this parameters should be configured according to
the definitions of the router/gateway in order to take
advantage of the QoS feature and to ensure that voice
packets will be handled accordingly.
Valid values are 0-255.
The default value is 0.
"ToS Precedence Threshold (AU and SU) – ToS based
prioritization is in accordance with the precedence bits of the
ToS field in the IP header. An IP packet received from the
Ethernet port will be routed to the Mid queue if one of the
following conditions is met:
a.The precedence in the ToS field is higher than the value of
the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter (applicable to both
tagged and untagged frames).
b. The VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame (hybrid or trunk
link) is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold
parameter.
All other packets received from the Ethernet port will be
routed to the Low queue.
Valid values are 0 to 7.
The default value is 3.
Menus and Parameters 2-53
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)
Allows defining the Layer 2 (Ethernet) broadcast and multicast filtering
capability. The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering allows enhancing the
security of the system and saving bandwidth on the wireless media
through blocking protocols that are typically used in the customer’s
LAN but are not relevant for other customers (e.g. NetBios that is used
by Microsoft Network Neighborhood). Enabling this feature blocks
Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts (the I/G bit at the destination
address is set to 1). This feature should not be enabled when there is a
router behind the SU.
The Ethernet Broadcasting Filtering menu allows viewing and setting the
following parameters:
!Filter Options – Defines the Ethernet broadcast filtering
functionality of the unit. The following options are available:
"Disable: No Ethernet broadcast filtering
"From Ethernet Only: Filter broadcast messages received
from the Ethernet port
"From WLAN Only: Filter broadcast messages received from
the wireless link port
"Both From Ethernet & WLAN: Filter broadcast messages
received from both the Ethernet port and the wireless link
port
The default selection is Disable.
!DHCP Broadcast Override Filter – Enables broadcasting of DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) messages. This is
independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above,
meaning that even if according to the selected filtering option,
broadcast messages should be filtered, DHCP broadcasts will be
transmitted if the Enable DHCP Broadcast option is selected.
Available selections are:
"Disable– DHCP Broadcast messages will be filtered or
transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by
the selected value of the Filter Options parameter.
"Enable– DHCP Broadcast messages will be transmitted
regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options
parameter.
The default selection is Disable.
!PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter – Enables broadcasting of PPPoE
(Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) messages. This is
independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above,
meaning that even if according to the selected filtering option
broadcast messages should be filtered, PPPoE broadcasts are
transmitted if the Enable PPPoE Broadcast option is selected.
Available selections are:
2-54 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
"Disable– PPPoE Broadcast messages is filtered or
transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by
the selected value of the Filter Options parameter.
"Enable– PPPoE Broadcast messages is transmitted
regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options
parameter.
The default selection is Disable.
!ARP Broadcast Override Filter –When this option is set to Enable
ARP Broadcast, broadcasting of ARP messages is independent of the
filtering option selected in Filter Options above. This means that
ARP broadcasts are transmitted regardless of which filtering option
is selected for broadcast messages.
Available selections are:
"Disable– ARP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted
according to the general filtering criteria set by the Filter
Options parameter.
"Enable– ARP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless
of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter.
The default selection is Enable.
Other Bridging Parameters
!LAN to Wireless Link Bridging Mode (AU only) – Controls the flow
of information from the Ethernet backbone to the wireless media.
The options are:
"Reject Unknown – Allows transmission of packets only to
addresses that the AU knows to exist in the wireless link.
"Forward Unknown – Allows transmission of all packets,
except those sent to addresses that the AU recognizes as
being on its wired Ethernet side.
The default selection is Forward Unknown.
!Bridge Aging Time (AU and SU) – Displays the current value for
bridge aging time for learned addresses of devices on both the wired
and wireless sides (not including BreezeACCESS units), and allows
entry of a new value.
The available range is 100 to 2000 seconds.
The default value is 300 seconds for AUs and for SUs with bridge
functionality (SU-BD and SU-BD1V). For all other SUs it is 1800
seconds.
!Broadcast Relaying (AU only) – Determines whether the unit
performs broadcast relaying. When Broadcast Relaying is enabled,
broadcast packets originating in devices on the wireless link are
transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to
the wired LAN. If disabled, these packets are sent only to the local
Menus and Parameters 2-55
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
wired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link. Disable
Broadcast Relaying if you are sure that all broadcast messages
from the wireless link will be destined to the wired LAN.
The default selection is Enable.
!Unicast Relaying (AU only) – Determines whether the unit performs
Unicast relaying. When Unicast Relaying is enabled, Unicast
packets originating in devices on the wireless link can be
transmitted back to the wireless link devices. If this parameter is
disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link even if they
are intended for devices on the wireless link. Disable Unicast
Relaying only if you know that all unicast messages from the
wireless link will be destined to the local wired LAN.
The default selection is Enable.
!Show Bridge Parameters – Displays the current values of the
Bridge parameters.
Performance Parameters (AU and
SU)
The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
!RTS Threshold – Defines the minimal frame size to require RTS/
CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshake. Frames with a
size below the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the
wireless link without being preceded with RTS frames. Setting this
parameter to a value larger than the maximum frame size will
prevent the RTS/CTS handshake for frames transmitted by this
unit.
The allowed range is from 20 to 1600.
The default value is 60 bytes for SUs and 1600 for AUs.
!Number of Retransmissions – The maximum number of times that
a packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted. This
parameter is not applicable when the ACSE Option is enabled.
Valid values are from 0 (no retransmissions) to 100.
The default value is 1.
!Number of Dwells to Retransmit – The minimum number of dwell
periods during which packets will be retransmitted. The Number of
Dwells to Retransmit parameter is used together with the Number
of Retransmissions parameter (see above) to spread the
retransmissions in both the time and frequency domains.
Valid values are from 0 to 9.
The default value is 2.
2-56 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate – The number of
unsuccessful retransmissions that will cause an automatic decrease
in the data rate before the next retransmission (the lower the data
rate, the higher the probability that the packet will be properly
received and acknowledged).
Valid values are from 0 to 10.
The default value is 0, meaning that the rate will be decreased
immediately following an unsuccessful transmission attempt at the
current rate.
!Minimum Contention Window – The BreezeACCESS system uses a
special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier
signal (Carrier Sense Multiple Access-CSMA) and analyzing the
information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate
the activity of other SUs served by the same AU. The target is to
minimize collisions in the wireless media resulting from trials of
more than one unit to transmit at the same time. The contention
window is the time that a unit will wait from the time it has decided
that there are no transmissions by other units until it will attempt
to transmit. The contention window is a random number whose
maximum value is determined by the value of the Minimum
Contention Window parameter and the number of previous trials
to transmit the frame. The higher the number of SUs served by the
same AU, the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU
should be.
The Valid values are from 7 to 255.
The default value is 31.
!Carrier Sense Level – This is the threshold level that determines
the existence of transmission from another unit on the wireless
media. As long as the level is above this threshold, the unit will
assume that another unit is transmitting and will refrain from trying
to transmit in order to prevent collisions.
The default value is -85 dBm
!Maximum Multicast Rate (AU only)– Determines the maximum
rate of multicast and broadcast transmissions. Multicast and
broadcast transmissions are not acknowledged; therefore there is a
chance that such transmissions will not be properly received
without the possibility of using the acknowledgement mechanism
for retransmission. Therefore, it is recommended to use a lower rate
for transmission of broadcast, multicast and control frames, to
increase the probability that they will be received without errors.
The available selections are 1, 2, and 3 Mbps.
NOTE:
The Number of Dwells to Retransmit is not applicable to ACSE voice frames since
voice is sensitive to delay. All ACSE voice frames will be retransmitted within the same
dwell, up to the maximum number of retransmissions allowed as defined by the ACSE
Number Of Retransmissions For Voice parameter.
Menus and Parameters 2-57
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The default is the minimum possible rate, 1Mbps.
!Multi-Rate – Link quality dynamically changes, due to various
environmental conditions. Dynamically switching between the
possible transmission rates increases the probability of using the
maximum rate for the current radio link quality at any given
moment. Decreasing the rate one step improves the receiver
sensitivity by 6-8dB. When enabled, the transmission rate decisions
are made separately for each unit. This algorithm is completely
separated from the retransmission mechanism defined by Number
of Retransmission and Number of Dwells to Retransmit
parameters. The algorithm provides Access Units with
simultaneous, adaptive support for multiple Subscriber Units at
different rates. The decision on the rate of each transmission (first
attempt) is based on counting transmissions, retransmissions and
successful windows. A window is defined as N consecutive
transmission or retransmission attempts, defined by the Multi-Rate
Decision Window Size parameter. A successful window is a window
in which the number of failed transmissions is not higher than a
defined threshold. A transmission is defined as failed if an ACK was
not received after the first transmission of a frame. If the current
rate is lower than the maximum available rate, the transmission
rate will be increased to the next available rate following a
successful window. If the current rate is higher than the minimum
available rate (1 Mbps), the transmission rate will be decreased to
the next available rate following a failed window. The Multi-Rate
menu includes the following parameters:
"Multi-Rate Support – Enables or disables the Multi-Rate
decision algorithm. When enabled, the algorithm supports
increase/decrease of transmission rates in the range from
1 Mbps to the current value of the Maximum Data Rate
parameter. (Enabling the algorithm has no effect if the
Maximum Data Rate is 1 Mbps).
The default selection is Enable.
"Multi-Rate Decision Window Size – Sets the size of the
decision window. The size of a window is measured as the
number of consecutive transmission or retransmission
attempts. Increasing the size of the window will increase the
probability that it will be a successful window, thus slowing
down the decision to degrade to a lower rate and accelerating
the decision to upgrade to a higher rate.
Valid values are from 1 to 50.
The default value is 12.
"Number of Failures in Multi-Rate Decision Window – Sets
the maximum number of failures allowed in a decision
window. A window is defined as successful only if the
number of failures is not higher than this number. A
transmission attempt is defined as a failure if an ACK was
not received upon the first transmission attempt. Increasing
2-58 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
the value of this parameter will increase the probability that
it will be a successful window, thus slowing down the
decision to degrade to a lower rate and accelerating the
decision to upgrade to a higher rate.
Valid value: 1 to Multi-Rate Decision Window Size.
Default value: 8.
!Dwell Time (AU only) – The time spent on a radio channel before
hopping to the next channel according to the operational hopping
sequence.
The allowed selections are 32, 64 and 128 Kilo-microseconds.
The default value is 128 Kilo-microseconds.
When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable
and the dwell time is the ACSE Dwell Time, set to a fixed value of 60
milliseconds.
Service Parameters (AU and SU)
The Service Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
!User Filtering Parameters – Only available in SUs. Defines IP
addresses of user’s devices that are authorized to access the
wireless media, serving for security and/or control purposes. It can
also be used to enable transmission/reception of specific protocol
frames only. These filtering functions do not affect management
frames that are sent to or generated by the unit or.
Choose this option to define the following parameters:
"User Filtering Option – Disables or enables the User
Filtering feature. The available options are:
#Disable (No filtering).
#IP Only (only IP Protocol packets pass).
#User Defined Addresses Only (only messages from IP
addresses included in the User Filter Addresses list pass).
#PPPoE Protocol Only (only PPPoE frames pass - Ethernet
type 0x8863 and 0x8864).
The default selection is Disable.
"Set User Filter Address – Displays the current User Filter IP
addresses. Allows you to enter up to 8 IP addresses to be
used if the User Defined Addresses Only option was selected
in the User Filtering Option above.
The default for all addresses is 000.000.000.000.
"Set User Filter Mask – Displays the current masks. Allows
you to enter subnet masks for each of the User Filter IP
Address entries.
Menus and Parameters 2-59
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The default for all subnet masks is 255.255.255.255.
"Set User Filter Range – Defines a range of addresses for
each of the User Filter IP Address entries (the range includes
the base address).
Valid values: 0 – 255.
The default value is 0 (not used).
"Delete a User Filtering Entry – Displays the current list of
IP addresses, subnet masks and ranges. Enter the list
number (from 0 to 7) to delete the entry from the list (the list
number will be replaced by the default values).
"Delete All User Filtering Entries – Deletes all User Filtering
entries (and replaces them with the default values).
"Show All User Filtering Parameters – Displays the current
User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses,
subnet masks and ranges.
!MIR and CIR Parameters – The CIR (Committed Information Rate)
value specifies the minimum data rate guaranteed to the applicable
subscriber. The MIR (Maximum Information Rate) value specifies
the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions, provided
such bandwidth is available.
Under normal conditions, the actual Information Rate (IR) will be
between the applicable CIR and MIR values: IR=CIR+K(MIR-CIR),
where K is between 0 to 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU
according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions
that may influence the performance of the wireless link. In some
situations the minimum rate (CIR) cannot be provided. This may
occur as a result of high demand and poor wireless link conditions
and/or high demand in cells with over subscription (total CIR higher
than 1600Kbps). When this happens, actual information rate will be
lower than CIR. The simple solution for managing information rate
in such cases results in an unfair allocation of resources, as
subscribers with higher CIR can actually get an IR lower than that
given to subscribers with lower CIR. A special algorithm for graceful
degradation has been incorporated into the AU, ensuring that the
degradation of performance for each individual subscriber will be
proportional to its CIR.
The MIR/CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data. To
average the performance over time, a special Burst Duration
algorithm is employed to enable higher transmission rates after a
NOTES:
You may use either Mask or Range (but not both) to define a group of user filter
addresses.
If IP broadcast packets should reach the devices connected behind the SU unit,
the Broadcast IP address should be included in the configured User Filter
Address entries.
2-60 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
period of inactivity. If no data was received from the Ethernet port
during the last N seconds, the unit is allowed to transmit N times its
CIR value without any delay. For example, after an inactivity time of
0.5 second, a unit with CIR = 64 Kbps can transmit up to 64 Kbits x
0.5 = 32 Kbits without any delay.
"MIR/CIR Option – Enables or disables the CIR/MIR
support feature. In cells where the AU and all SUs use SW
version 4.0 and higher, the MIR/CIR Option in the AU
controls the operation of the whole cell. The MIR/CIR Option
in the SU is thus meaningless, as the setting of the option in
the AU will override possible conflicting setting in any of the
served SUs. The option is available in the SUs only for
compatibility with previous versions to support operation in
cells where the AU uses SW version 3.X and lower.
Default selection is Disable.
"MIR: AU to SU (SU only) – Sets the Maximum Information
Rate of the down-link from the AU to the SU. The MIR value
cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
Valid values are from 32 to 2200 Kbps.
The default value is 128 Kbps.
"MIR: SU to AU (SU only) – Sets the Maximum Information
Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The MIR value
cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
Valid values are from 32 to 2200Kbps.
The default value is 128Kbps.
"CIR: AU to SU (SU only) – Sets the Committed Information
Rate of the down-link from the AU to the SU. The CIR value
cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
Valid values are from 0 to 2200Kbps.
The default value is 64Kbps.
"CIR: SU to AU (SU only) – Sets the Committed Information
Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The CIR value
cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
Valid values are from 0 to 2200Kbps.
The default value is 64Kbps.
"Maximum Burst Duration (SU and AU) – Sets the maximum
time for accumulating burst transmission rights according
to the Burst Duration algorithm.
NOTE:
The value of the MIR/CIR option parameter must be the same for all Subscriber
Units served by the same AU (i.e. Enable for all SUs or Disable for al SUs).
Otherwise, throughput to/from all SUs in the cell may be reduced significantly
Menus and Parameters 2-61
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Valid values: 0 – 2000 (milliseconds).
Default value: 5 (milliseconds), allowing a maximum burst of
(0.005 X CIR) Kbps, after an inactivity period of 5
milliseconds or more.
"Maximum Delay (SU only) – Sets the maximum permitted
delay in the buffers system. Some applications are very
sensitive to delay. If relatively high delays are permitted,
such applications may suffer from poor performance due to
accumulation in the buffers of data from other applications
(e.g. FTP). The Maximum Delay parameter limits the number
of available buffers. Data that is delayed more than the
permitted maximum delay will be discarded. If the SU
should support applications that are very sensitive to delay,
the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased.
Valid values: 300 – 10000 (milliseconds).
Default value: 5000 (milliseconds).
"Graceful Degradation Limit (AU only) – Sets the limit on
using the graceful degradation algorithm. In cases of over
demand, the performance of all SUs will be degraded
proportionally to their CIR (IR=(100%-k%) x CIR). The
graceful degradation algorithm will be used as long as k ≤ K,
where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit. Beyond this point
the simple “brute force” algorithm will be used. The higher is
the expected over demand in a cell, the higher should be the
value of the Graceful Degradation Limit. Higher demand can
be expected in cases of significant over subscription and/or
in deployments where a high number of subscribers are in
locations that do not enable proper communication with the
AU at the highest data rate.
Valid values: 0 – 70 (%).
Default value: 70 (%). (Do not use the graceful degradation
algorithm)
"Mir Only option (AU only) – Enables or disables the option
of forcing the MIR/CIR algorithm to use MIR values only. The
MIR/CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate
for each of the supported SUs under changing demand
conditions, based on the configured CIR and MIR values.
When the Mir Only Option is enabled, the MIR/CIR
algorithm is overridden and is forced to operate with MIR
values only (e.g. the AU attempts to enable all SUs to
transmit/receive information at the specified MIR value.
When enabled, the graceful degradation algorithm, which is
a part of the CIR/MIR algorithm, is also disabled.
The default is Disable.
"Show MIR/CIR Parameters – Displays the current values of
the MIR and CIR parameters. In SUs, the display includes
2-62 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
the Run-Time MIR/CIR Option, which is the actual status of
the option (may be different from the MIR/CIR Option
selected in the SU because it is controlled by the AU).
!Show Service Parameters – Displays the current values of the
Service Parameters.
Security Parameters (AU and SU)
Unauthorized wireless connection is prevented by using the Wired
Equivalent Privacy (WEP) algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.11 Wireless
LAN standard. The WEP is based on RSA’s RC4 encryption algorithm.
The following parameters are available in the Security Parameters menu:
!Authentication Algorithm – Determines the operation mode of the
unit. The available options are:
"Open System: An SU configured to Open System can be
authenticated only by an AU that is also configured to Open
System. The WEP algorithm is not used.
"Shared Key: Authentication enabled. The authentication
messages are encrypted. An SU configured to use Shared
Key can be authenticated only by an AU configured to use
Shared Key, provided they both use the same WEP Key.
If the required algorithem is Shared Key, do the following:
• Define at least one of the four WEP Keys by selecting one
of them from the Security Parameters menu and entering
the required key.
• Select Default Key ID from the Security Parameters
menu and enter the number of a defined WEP key.
• Select Authentication Algorithm from the Security
Parameters menu.
The Authentication Algorithm menu opens.
• Select Shared Key.
The default is Open System.
!Default Key ID – Defines the ID of the key to be used for encryption
of transmitted authentication messages and decryption of received
authentication messages.
Valid values are from 1 to 4.
The default is WEP KEY # 1.
!WEP KEY # 1 through WEP KEY # 4 – Enters the encryption key to
be used for initialization of the pseudo-random number generator
used in the RC4 encryption process. At least one WEP Key must be
NOTE:
The Shared Key option cannot be selected until at least one WEP Key
and the appropriate Default Key ID are configured.
Menus and Parameters 2-63
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
configured before the Shared Key authentication mode can be used.
The Subscriber Unit must use the same WEP Key that is used by
the Access Unit.
The WEP Key is a string of 10 hexadecimal numbers.
The default for all 4 keys is a string of 10 zeros (no key).
Voice Parameters (Subscriber Units
with Voice Support Only)
The parameters in the Voice Parameters menu include the following
options:
!Volume – Sets the gain of the voice signal to the earphone.
Available range is 0 dB to -20 dB in 1 dB steps.
The default value is -3 dB.
!Echo Cancellation – Enables or disables the built-in echo
cancellation feature.
The default value is Enable.
!Voice Codec – Specifys the relative priority of the codecs. The units
support the following codecs:
"G723.1 (6.4 Kbps rate, 1:10 compression ratio)
"G729 (8 Kbps rate, 1:8 compression ratio)
"G711 Ulaw (64 Kbps, no compression, US standard)
"G711 Alaw (64 Kbps, no compression, European Standard)
"G729AnnexA (G729 with reduced complexity)
"G729wAnnexB (G729 with silence compression)
"G729Annex AwAnnexB (G729 with reduced complexity and
silence compression)
You can enter a list of one to seven codecs, specifying the relative
priorities to be offered during capabilities’ exchange according to the
H.323 standard. For example, enter 1 to always use the G.723.1
codec. Enter 2, 1, 3, 4 to set the priorities according to the following
order: G729, G723.1, G711µlaw, G711 Alaw.
The range is 1 to 7654321.
The default is 2134.
!Compression Efficiency – Specifys the number of voice frames to
be packed into one RTP (Real Time Protocol) frame. The higher the
NOTE:
It is recommended to change the WEP Keys periodically, to enhance system security.
2-64 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
value of the Frames per Packet parameter, the higher are the delay
introduced (reduced quality) and the higher is the number of
simultaneous voice sessions that can be supported by the AU. There
is a separate setting for each of the voice codecs that are supported
by the unit.
The allowed range differs among codecs, in accordance with the
different packet sizes (30 ms for G723.1, 10 ms for G729 and 5 ms
for G711).
The valid values and default values are:
"G723 Frames Per Packet – Valid range 1-8, Default value is
2
"G729 Frames Per Packet – Valid range is 1-12, Default
value is 6. If upgrading from a previous version, this value
must be set to 6 if ACSE Option is enabled. (covers all G729
codecs, including G729Annex A, G729wAnnexB and
G729AnnexAwAnnexB)
"G711u-law Frames Per Packet – Valid range is 1-16,
Default value is 12
"G711A-law Frames Per Packet – Valid range is 1-16,
Default value is 12
!Voice Activity Detection – Enables or disables the use of Voice
Activity Detection (VAD). When the VAD algorithm is enabled,
silence intervals are identified. Therefore, only relevant information
is transmitted, using less bandwidth than during voice activity
intervals. This allows for a better overall utilization of the available
bandwidth. Voice Activity Detection is not applicable when using the
G711 codec. Voice Activity Detection is implemented automatically
in G729wAnnexB and G729 Annex A w Annex B (Annex B activates
the silence compression).
Available options are:
"Voice Activity Detection OFF.
"Voice Activity Detection G7231 (enable when using
G723.1 compression).
The default selection is Voice Activity Detection OFF.
Dialing Parameters (Subscriber
Units with Voice Support Only)
The parameters in the Dialing Parameters menu include the following
options:
NOTE:
When the ACSE Option is enabled, this parameter is not applicable and the default
value is always used.
Menus and Parameters 2-65
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
!Pulse Dialing – Enables or disables the automatic pulse dialing
detection feature to support telephones with pulse dialing.
The default selection is Enable.
!Gatekeeper Option – If set to Enable, the unit will communicate
with the Gatekeeper to resolve the destination telephone number
into the IP address and to register its own phone number and IP
address with the Gatekeeper.
The default selection is Disable.
!GateKeeper/GateWay IP Address – Specifys the IP address of the
Gateway/Gatekeeper. If the Gatekeeper Option parameter (see
above) is set to Enable, an IP address must be specified.
The default value is 000.000.000.000.
!Alternate Gatekeeper Option - Enables or disables the Alternate
Gatekeeper feature. For the purposes of ensuring system
availability, redundancy, and scalability, the Gatekeeper may
provide the RAS signaling function by utilizing multiple physical or
logical devices, referred to as Alternate Gatekeepers.
If the Alternate Gatekeeper Option set to Automatic Discover, the
Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is received from the Primary GK.
Otherwise, in Manual Discovery mode the Alternate Gatekeeper IP
address is specified by the Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address
parameter (see below).
Valid selections: Disable, Enable (Automatic Discovery), Enable
(Manual Discovery).
Default selection is Disable.
!Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address – Sets the Alternate Gatekeeper
IP address when Alternate Gatekeeper Option parameter (see above)
is set to Manual.
The default value is 000.000.000.000.
!Telephone Number – The telephone number as specified in the
Gateway (if it is required by the specific type of Gateway used).
Valid values: up to 10 digits (0-9).
The default number is 0000....0 (10 zeros).
!H323 Terminal ID – The H323 Terminal ID (Name) to be used for
calling the terminal when the caller uses this feature (e.g.
NetMeeting).
Valid values: up to 24 characters.
The default selection is X (No H323 Terminal ID).
NOTE:
When using a Gateway without a Gatekeeper, this number must be predefined in the
Gateway
2-66 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!IP Dialing Option – Enables or disables dialing using IP addresses.
The default selection is Enable.
!IP Dialing Indicator – Specifys the prefix used to identify an IP
Dialing string. Applicable only if the IP Dialing Option parameter (see
above) is set to Enable. Digits dialed after IP Dialing Prefix are
assumed to be the destination IP address. 12- and 3-digit numbers
are allowed. 3- digit numbers are used to dial to stations in the
same subnet, and 12- digit number are used to dial to any IP
address. If a 3-digit number is dialed the Setup message is sent to
the corresponding IP address in the local subnet. When dialing a
12-digit number (e.g. abcdefghijkl), the Setup message is sent
directly to the IP address abc.def.ghi.jkl.
Valid values: up to 3 phone key-pad digits (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)
The default value is *.
!Automatic Prefix – Specifys a default prefix (number of the
Gateway trunk port) to be automatically inserted and transmitted to
the gateway before the dialed number. The Automatic Prefix will be
inserted only if the Dialing Option parameter (see below) is
disabled, or if it is enabled and the first dialed digit is different from
the defined Inter-Regional Prefix.
Valid values: up to 8 phone key-pad digits (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)
The default is X (no Gateway Prefix).
!Fast Start – Enables or disables the fast connect protocol, which is
a H.323 Version II feature that allows decreasing the connection
set-up time (if supported by the Gateway).
The original procedure prior to H.323 Version II required four round
trips of messages between endpoints before the first media stream is
exchanged between peers. Fast Connect, or Fast Start, is a new
procedure added to H.323 version II. It reduces the number of
round trips to one by combining the call connect procedures into a
single H.225 transaction.
The default selection is Enable.
!Information Transfer Capability – To define the value of the
information transfer capability element in the Q.931 SETUP
message.
Available selections:
"Speech (used by H.323 speech terminals)
"Unrestricted (used by H.323 AudioVisual terminals for
unrestricted digital information)
"Restricted (used H.323 AudioVisual terminals for restricted
digital information)
"3.1 kHz audio (used by H.323 speech terminals)
Menus and Parameters 2-67
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
"Unrestricted with tones (used by H.323 AudioVisual
terminals for transmission of unrestricted digital information
with tones/announcement)
"Video (not used by H.323 terminals)
The default is Speech.
!Dialing Prefix Parameters – Supports definition of prefix strings
indicating an inter-regional or international call. The algorithm
supports dialing plans where one specific digit is used as the prefix
for inter-regional calls, and two specific digits are used as the prefix
for international calls, where the first one is the same as the
inter-regional call prefix. It can also support dialing plans in which
the inter-regional prefix should be removed at the CPE before the
dialed number is transferred to the system. The dialing plan support
algorithm incorporated into the units operates as follows:
• If the Dialing Prefix Option is disabled the unit will insert the
Automatic Prefix (if defined) before the dialed number.
Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed.
• If the Dialing Prefix Option is set to Enabled and the first
dialed digit differs from the Inter-Regional Prefix the unit will
insert the Automatic Prefix (if defined) before the dialed
number. Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed.
• If the Dialing Prefix Option is set to Enable & Block Inter-
Regional Prefix and the first dialed digit differs from the
Inter-Regional Prefix, the unit will insert the Automatic
Prefix (if defined) before the dialed number. If the first dialed
digit is the Inter-Regional Prefix and the second one differs
from the International Prefix (indicating an inter-regional
call), the first digit (the Inter-Regional Prefix) will be removed
before forwarding the dialed number, thus blocking inter-
regional calls at the unit. Otherwise it will be forwarded as
dialed.
"Dialing Prefix Option – Enables or disables the dialing
prefix support capability.
Valid options are: Disable, Enable, Enable & Block Inter-
Regional Prefix.
Default selection is Disable.
"Inter-Regional Prefix – Defines the prefix indicating an
inter-regional call. This is also the first digit in the two digits
string indicating an international call.
Valid values: One phone key-pad digit (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)
and X (no prefix).
NOTE:
This information element is encoded according to Figure 4-11/Q.931 and Table 4-6/
Q.931. The SU support only H323 Speech traffic and a change of the default value
is not recommended. A change will be needed only as result of special PSTN switch
requirements.
2-68 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Default value: 0.
"International Prefix – Defines the second digit in the two
digits string indicating an international call.
Valid values: One phone key-pad digit (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)
and X (no prefix).
Default value: 0.
!Registration TTL – Defines the registration Time To Live.
Registration is the process by which an endpoint informs the
Gatekeeper of its Transport Addresses and alias addresses.
Registration must occur before any calls are attempted and may
occur periodically as necessary (for example, at endpoint power-up).
After Registration process has finished an endpoint will no longer
send Registration Request (RRQ) messages. So, GK may become
unavailable for the endpoint after its reset. To exclude this
possibility a keep-alive mechanism should be applied.
An endpoint's registration with a Gatekeeper may have a finite
lifetime. An endpoint may request a timeToLive in the RRQ
message to the Gatekeeper. The Gatekeeper may respond with an
RCF containing the same timeToLive or a shorter timeToLive.
After this time, the registration shall be expired. The timeToLive is
expressed in seconds. Prior to the expiration time, the endpoint may
send an RRQ message having the keepAlive bit set. The keep-alive
RRQ resets the time to live timer in the Gatekeeper, allowing the
registration to be extended. After the expiration time, the endpoint
must re-register with a Gatekeeper using a full RRQ message.
Valid values: 0 (the keep-alive mechanism is not activated), 1-65535
(seconds)
Default value: 0
!DTMF Relay – Selects the method of handling DTMF signals. DTMF
input may be transferred through a network in-band by RTP
payloads, or using DTMF relay. The use of DTMF relay is preferred
as it overcomes the problems of RTP packet loss and jitter. When
DTMF relay is used, DTMF digits are transferred using H.245
protocol messages (standard), or Q.931 protocol message
(proprietary). The DTMF relay can handle all phone-pad digits (0-9,
A-D, *, #) and Hook-Flash (!).
The following options are available:
"Disable – DTMF tones are transferred in band (through the
voice codec using the RTP protocol)
"Enable – DTMF signals are relayed via H.245 sessions. If
Fast Start is enabled, a H.245 session will be forced upon
detecting DTMF signals.
"Enable Proprietary – If Fast Start is enabled, DTMF signal
will be relayed via Q.931 sessions. If Fast Start is disabled,
DTMF signal will be relayed via H.245 sessions.
Menus and Parameters 2-69
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
The default selection is Enable.
!Endpoint Type – Defines the EndpointType components in H.323
messages for interoperability with other equipment using H.323.
Available options are Terminal, Gateway.
The default is Terminal
!Fax Relay – Defines the use of T.38 protocol for relaying fax
messages. T.38 is a protocol dedicated to fax. In the T.38
architecture, fax signals are demodulated at the voice/fax gateway
and sent over the IP network as IP fax packets using either TCP or
UDP, depending on the service environment. TCP provides 100%
error-free transmission, but the downside is reduced real-time
performance. When congestion occurs, routers discard TCP packets
first. UDP has good real-time performance, since routers do not
discard datagrams as readily as TCP packets. However, the
downside of UDP is a reduced quality of service. It is possible for
datagrams to get lost, arrive out of order, or to be duplicated. A
redundancy mechanism can be employed to restore IFP fax data
packets. At the other end of the IP network, the remote gateway
decodes IP fax packets and regenerates fax signals.
Modulation methods that can be used with the T.38 format are V.21
Channel 2, V.27ter 2400, V.27ter 4800, V.29 7200, V.29 9600, V.17
7200, V.17 9600, V.17 12000, and V.17 14400.
The Fax Relay menu includes the following parameters:
"Fax Relay Option – Enables or disables the use of the T.38
protocol for relaying fax messages.
The default selection is Disable.
"Fax Relay Redundancy – Defines the redundancy (number
of additional times each fax frame is transmitted) to be used
when transmitting T.38 fax messages.
Valid values: 0 –5.
Default value: 3.
!Battery Polarity – Defines the battery polarity for supporting an
external device, e.g. for coins or tokens charging purpose. This
feature is fully supported by units with voice card from revision D
and up.
The available options are:
"Forward Battery – Regular polarity
"Reverse Battery – Reverse polarity
NOTE:
To enable the Fax Relay Option, the Fast Start parameter must also be
enabled.
2-70 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
"Forward -> Reverse Battery – Change the polarity from
forward to reverse
"Reverse -> Forward Battery – Change the polarity from
reverse to forward
The default is Forward Battery.
!Caller ID: Defines whether the unit will support generation of Caller
ID (CID) signaling and if CID generation is supported, which
standard will be used. The unit supports two CID signaling
standards:
"Voice band Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) signaling in
accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 – 1
"1200-baud tone modulation in accordance with Bellcore 202
standard.
The Caller ID parameter is supported only by units using a Voice card
HW revision D and higher.
The following options are available:
"Disable
"ETSI DT-AS: CID signaling in accordance with ETSI
ETS 300 659 -1, using Dual Tone Alerting Signal to
indicated to the called terminal that CID data transmission
is to be expected.
"ETSI RP-AS: CID signaling in accordance with ETSI
ETS 300 659 -1, using Ringing Pulse Alerting Signal to
indicate to the called terminal that CID data transmission is
to be expected.
"ETSI – During Ringing: CID signaling in accordance with
ETSI ETS 300 659 -1, transmitting CID data during the first
long silence between two ring patterns.
"Bellcore MDMF: CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore
202, using Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF), which
includes a name field in addition to the date, time and
number.
"Bellcore SDMF: CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore
202, using Single Data Message Format (SDMF), which
includes the date, time and number.
!Stop Dialing Timeout: The inactivity time following the last dialed
digit that will be identified by the unit as an indication to end of
dialing.
Valid range: 3 to 60 seconds
Default value: 5 seconds
!Stop Dialing Indicator: Uses the # sign to indicate end of dialing,
thus to speed the dialing process. The options are:
Menus and Parameters 2-71
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
"Disable: The # sign is interpreted as a part of the dialed
sequence. End of dialing is determined by the Stop Dialing
Timeout parameter.
"Enable: The # sign is interpreted as indicating end of dialing
sequence.
Telephony Signals (Subscriber
Units with Voice Support Only)
The Telephony Signals menu defines the various call progress tones that
indicate the status of a telephone call, the ringer parameters and some
timeouts. The call progress tones are generated by the Subscriber Unit
in accordance with call progress information as received from the AU or
the telephony network.
The parameters in the Telephony Signals menu include the following
options:
!Telephony Country Standard – Selects the call progress tones
standard. The following options are available:
"Proprietary – Allows definition of specific tones as described
below.
"Germany
"Sweden
"France
"United Kingdom
"Belgium
"USA
"Chile
The default selection is USA.
!Dial Tone –Defines the dial tone transmitted to the earphone to
indicate that the call can be supported by the system and that the
caller may start dialing.
!Ring-Back Tone – Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to
indicate that the telephone of the called party is ringing.
!Busy Tone – Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to
indicate that the telephone of the called party is busy.
!Congestion Tone - Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to
indicate that the system cannot currently support the call (e.g. if a
line is not available since the AU currently supports the maximum
allowed number of voice sessions).
!Error Tone – Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to
indicate that the system cannot currently support the call (e.g. if for
2-72 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
any reason the call was disconnected because of a problem in the
wireless link or incompatible capabilities) or if the user did not hang
up after exceeding the specified duration of the Dial, Ring Back,
Busy or Congestion Tones.
!High Level Error Tone – Defines the high level tone transmitted to
the earphone to better attract the attention of the user if he did not
hang up after exceeding the specified duration of the Error Tone.
The various tones are defined by specifying the following
parameters:
"Frequency 1 – One of two frequencies that can be used for
generating the applicable tone.
Valid values are 0-3000 (in Hz).
"Frequency 2 – The second of the two frequencies to be used
for generating the applicable tone.
Valid values are 0-3000 (in Hz).
"Level 1 – The level (in dBm) of Frequency 1.
Valid values are –32 to +3.
"Level 2 – The level (in dBm) of Frequency 2.
Valid values are –32 to +3.
"Cadence On – The ringing time (on) in the tones-silence
sequence of the tone.
Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds, 0 (0 means that
the tone is not used).
"Cadence Off – The silence time (off) in the tones-silence
sequence of the tone.
Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds, 0 (0 means no
silence – a continuous tone).
"Duration – The maximum duration of transmitting the tone
to the earphone. Tone generation will cease upon hang-up.
Valid values are 0 – 10,000 seconds.
!Ring Frequency - Defines the ring frequency parameters (that
define the ringing of the telephone set), if the selected Telephony
Country parameter is Proprietary. The following parameters can be
defined:
"Ringer Frequency – the frequency of activating the Ringer.
Valid values are: 17Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, 50Hz.
"Cadence On – The ringing time (on) in the ringing-silence
sequence of the Ringer.
Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds.
Menus and Parameters 2-73
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
"Cadence Off – The silence time (on) in the ringing-silence
sequence of the Ringer.
Valid values are 100 – 10,000 milliseconds.
"Duration - The maximum duration of activating the ringer.
Ringing will cease upon detecting off-hook condition.
Valid values are 0 – 10,000 seconds.
!Timeouts – Defines the following timeouts:
"Min. Flash Detect Timeout and Max. Flash Detect
Timeout – A short on-hook time that is between the values
of these two parameters will be considered as Hook Flash.
Valid values: 0 – 2,000 milliseconds
"Disconnect Timeout – The minimum time for decision on
an on-hook condition.
Valid values: 0 – 2,000 milliseconds
"Inter-Digit Timeout – Applicable only for pulse dialing. The
minimum time between two consecutive pulses to be
considered as separating between two digits.
Valid values: 0 – 2,000 milliseconds
"Called Party Release Timeout – The minimum time for an
on-hook signal on the called party side to be considered as
call disconnect.
Valid values: 0 – 10,000 seconds
The following tables provide details concerning the values of the
parameters of the various call progress tones and the ringer as well as
the Timeouts for the available country standards.
2-74 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Table 2-14: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - Germany
Table 2-15: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - USA
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off
(ms)
Dial Tone 450 -18 0 0 15
Ring Back 450 -18 0 0 1000 4000 60
Busy 450 -18 0 0 500 500 15
Congestion 450 -18 0 0 250 250 0
Error 450 -18 0 0 200 200 0
High Level
Error 0000000
Ring
Frequency 25 1000 5000 60
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off
(ms)
Dial Tone 350 -13 440 -13 15
Ring Back 440 -19 480 -19 1000 3000 60
Busy 480 -24 620 -24 500 500 15
Congestion 480 -24 620 -24 1000 1000 0
Error 480 -24 620 -24 200 200 0
High Level
Error 0000000
Ring
Frequency 20 1000 3000 60
Menus and Parameters 2-75
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 2-16: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - Sweden
Table 2-17: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - France
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off
(ms)
Dial Tone 425 -18 0 0 15
Ring Back 425 -18 0 0 1000 5000 60
Busy 425 -18 0 0 250 250 15
Congestion 425 -18 0 0 250 750 0
Error 425 -18 0 0 200 200 0
High Level
Error 0000000
Ring
Frequency 25 1000 5000 60
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off
(ms)
Dial Tone 425 -18 0 0 15
Ring Back 425 -18 0 0 1500 3500 60
Busy 425 -18 0 0 500 500 15
Congestion 425 -18 0 0 500 500 0
Error 425 -18 0 0 200 200 0
High Level
Error 0000000
Ring
Frequency 25 1500 3500 60
2-76 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Table 2-18: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer – United Kingdom
Table 2-19: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer - Belgium
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off
(ms)
Dial Tone 350 -18 440 -18 15
Ring Back 400 -18 450 -18 400 200 60
Busy 400 -18 0 0 375 375 15
Congestion 400 -18 0 0 400 350 0
Error 400 -18 0 0 200 200 0
High Level
Error 0000000
Ring
Frequency 25 400 200 60
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off
(ms)
Dial Tone 425 -12 0 0 15
Ring Back 425 -18 0 0 1000 3000 60
Busy 425 -18 0 0 500 500 15
Congestion 425 -18 0 0 167 167 0
Error 425 -18 0 0 200 200 0
High Level
Error 0000000
Ring
Frequency 25 1000 3000 60
Menus and Parameters 2-77
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Table 2-20: Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer – Chile
Table 2-21: Timeouts
Hopping Parameters (GU)
The Hopping Parameters Menu allows configuration of the hopping
mechanism. The GPS modules deliver signals to the Access Units that
insure that their hopping patterns are fully synchronized. This includes
synchronizing the time each unit starts a new hop and ensuring that
units start the hopping sequence simultaneously.
!Number of Hopping Frequencies – Configures the Number of
Hopping Frequencies parameter to guarantee that all the Access
Units managed by the GPS module will start their hopping sequence
simultaneously.
To determine the correct number of hopping frequencies, access the
monitor program in one of the AU units, select Show Basic
Configuration in the Info Screens menu and view the Number of
Hopping Frequencies value displayed.
Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Cadence Duration (s)
Tone Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) Freq
(Hz) Level
(dB) On (ms) Off (ms)
Dial Tone 400 -6 0 0 20
Ring Back 400 -6 0 0 1000 3000 120
Busy 400 -6 0 0 500 500 20
Congestion 400 -6 0 0 200 200 20
Error 400 -6 0 0 500 500 20
High Level
Error 400 3 0 0 500 500 20
Ringer 20 1000 3000 120
Country Min. Flash
Detect (ms) Max Flash
Detect (ms) Disconnect
(ms) Inter-digit
(ms) Called
Party
Release (s)
Germany 120 1000 1000 100 0
USA 120 1000 1000 100 0
Sweden 120 1000 1000 100 0
France 120 1000 1000 100 0
United Kingdom 120 1000 1000 100 0
Belgium 120 1000 1000 100 0
Chile 220 320 320 500 60
2-78 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
If the ISM hopping sequence is used (ISM US FCC or ISM
International), the number of hopping frequencies is 79.
!Dwell Time – Applicable only when the ACSE Option is disabled.
When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable
and the dwell time is the ACSE Dwell Time, set to a fixed value of
60 milliseconds (see page 2-58).
!ACSE Option – see page 2-40
!Synchronization Signal Source – Defines the source of the
synchronization signals. The possible selections are:
"GPS Antenna or Internal
"Local (from other GU)
When using a single GU, it should always be configured to GPS
Antenna or Internal.
When using several daisy-chained units and a GPS antenna is
connected to the first (“Master”) unit, than ALL units should also be
configured to GPS Antenna or Internal.
When using several daisy-chained units without a GPS antenna,
than the first (”Master”) unit that generates the self-synchronization
signals for all units unit should be configured to GPS Antenna or
Internal. All other units (“Slave units”) that get the synchronization
signals from the “Master” unit should be configured to Local (from
other GU).
The default is GPS Antenna or Internal.
Alarm Parameters (GU)
The GU module serves also as the alarms control unit for the
BreezeACCESS system and auxiliary equipment. It has dry contact
connections to 4 external alarm inputs (Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4),
that turn on upon contact closure. It also receives alarm indications
from BreezeACCESS power supply module (Alarm In 7 through Alarm
In 10), that turn on to indicate a power failure or over temperature
problem in any of the two optional power supplies. PS1 alarms refer to a
power supply module inserted in the left-most slot of the chassis. PS2
alarms refer to a power supply module inserted in the right-most slot of
NOTE:
The values of the ACSE Option and Dwell Time (if the ACSE Option is disabled)
parameters must be the same for all GPS modules and Access Units in the system to
enable synchronized hopping.
WARNING:
Do not connect a GPS antenna to the BS-GU module when the selected
Synchronization Signal Source is Local. This will cause collisions of signals and
may damage the equipment.
Menus and Parameters 2-79
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
the chassis. Alarm In 5 (GPS Antenna Status) is generated internally in
the GU module, and it is turned on to indicate that proper PPS (pulse
per second) timing signals are received from the GPS antenna.
The GU module can also control 3 Alarm Out relay, where each relay
has a common contact, a normally open (NO) contact and a normally
closed (NC) contact.
The Alarm Parameters menu allows access to the following sub-menus:
!Alarms In Names.
!Alarms Out Names.
!Automatic Alarms Out Definition.
!Alarms Out Control.
!Show Alarm Parameters.
Alarms In Names
The Alarms In Names menu allows names for each of the four external
alarm indications that can be connected to the AL IN connector to be
defined. These names can reflect the specific environment in which the
module is being used (e.g. “Smoke Detector 1” or “Main Door”).
Each Alarms In Name can contain up to 31 printable ASCII characters
(case sensitive).
The default names are Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4.
Alarms Out Names
The Alarms Out Names menu allows names for each of the three
external devices that can be connected to the AL OUT connector to be
defined. These names can reflect the specific environment in which the
module is being used (e.g. “Alarm Light 1”).
Each Alarms Out Name can contain up to 31 printable ASCII characters
(case sensitive).
The default names are Alarm Out 1 through Alarm Out 3.
Automatic Alarms Out Definition
The Automatic Alarms Out Definition menu allows you to define the
conditions under which each of the 3 Alarms Out are to be activated
(when operating in Automatic mode). The available options for each of
the three Alarms Out are:
!1 – Activate if Alarm In 1 turns ON.
NOTES:
Over Temperature alarm indication is only supported by the AC power supply module.
In installations with a single power supply module, the GU module doesn’t function
(and therefore will not provide an alarm indication) upon total failure of the power
supply or upon failure of the 5 V module.
2-80 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
!2 – Activate if Alarm In 2 turns ON.
!3 – Activate if Alarm In 3 turns ON.
!4 – Activate if Alarm In 4 turns ON.
!5 - Activate if Alarm In 5 (GPS Antenna Status) turns ON
!6 - Not Applicable (Alarm In 6 is not defined)
!7 - Activate if Alarm In 7 (PS1Over Temperature) turns ON
!8 - Activate if Alarm In 8 (PS2 Over Temperature) turns ON
!9 - Activate if Alarm In 9 (PS1 Power) turns ON
!10 - Activate if Alarm In 10 (PS2 Power) turns ON
!N – None (never activate this Alarm Out).
!A - Activate if ANY of the Alarms In turns ON.
The default for all three Alarms Out is 0 (None – never activate the
alarm).
Alarms Out Control
The Alarms Out Control menu allows the functionality of the Alarms Out
control mechanism to be defined. Its main purpose is to support
“manual” activation/deactivation of each of the Alarms Out either
locally or remotely using Telnet or SNMP. For each of the three Alarms
Out, the following control options are available:
!0 – Turn Alarm OFF (even if it should be ON according to the
definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu).
!1 – Turn Alarm ON (even if it should be OFF according to the
definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu).
!2 – Automatic (activate/deactivate according to the definition in the
Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu).
The default for all three Alarms Out is 2 (Automatic).
Show Alarm Parameters
Shows the current values of the Alarms In and Alarms Out parameters
as well as their current status:
!Alarms In Names And Status
Displays the names and current status (ON or OFF) for all Alarm In
indications, including “internal” alarms, as follows:
"Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4: Name according to the name
defined in the Alarms In Names Menu.
"Alarm In 5: GPS Antenna Status.
"Alarm In 6: NA (reserved for future use).
Menus and Parameters 2-81
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
"Alarm In 7: PS1 Over Temperature (over temperature
indication for BS-PS Power Supply module 1, which is the
module inserted in the left-most slot of the chassis).
"Alarm In 8: PS2 Over Temperature (over temperature
indication for BS-PS Power Supply module 2, which is the
module inserted in the right-most slot of the chassis).
"Alarm In 9: PS1 Power (power fail indication for BS-PS Power
Supply module 1, which is the module inserted in the left-
most slot of the chassis).
"Alarm In 10: PS2 Power (power fail indication for BS-PS
Power Supply module 2, which is the module inserted in the
right-most slot of the chassis).
!Alarms Out Names, Definitions, Control and Status
Displays the following information for each of the three Alarms Out:
"Name: Name according to the name defined in the Alarms In
Names Menu.
"Definition: NONE, Alarm In # or ANY, according to the
configuration in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu.
"Control: OFF, ON or AUTO, according to the configuration in
the Alarms Out Control Menu.
"Status: ON or OFF.
NOTE:
In some installations only one Power Supply module (either PS1 or PS2) may
be used.
2-82 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
Chapter 3
Configuration
Download/Upload
This chapter describes the method of configuring a large number of
BreezeACCESS units at once.
About This Chapter
3-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 Operations and Administration
Manual Revision: 1.01
The Configuration Download/Upload feature in BreezeACCESS units
simplifies the task of remotely configuring a large number of units using
TFTP protocol.
By downloading the configuration file to a PC it is possible to view all the
parameters configured at the unit, as it is a plain text ASCII file.
It is necessary to edit the file by a using simple editor and to remove
certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the
configuration to another unit.
When multiple configuration is performed (uploading the file to several
units) it is recommended that only the relevant parameters be included
in the file .
Each parameter is represented in the file by three fields:
!A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the
monitor program, followed by “=”.
!The value of the parameters (using the same values that are used in
the monitor program).
!A comment (optional). If used, it should start with a “;” character.
The unit will ignore an unknown parameter or a known parameter with
an out of range value.
Use the SNMP write community string (the default is “private”) to define
both the uploaded file (put) and the downloaded file (get):
SnmpWriteCommunity.cfg
The file should be transferred in ASCII mode.
Example:
To upload the configuration file using DOS based TFTP Client to an SU
whose IP address is 206.25.63.65:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cfg
To download the configuration file from the same unit:
tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cfg Suconf
BreezeACCESS V
System Manual:
Appendices
Appendix A:
Software Version
Loading Procedure
General
Firmware upgrades to the unit's FLASH memory are performed by a
simple loading procedure using a TFTP application. Before performing
an upgrade procedure, be sure you have the correct files and latest
instructions.
Verify that you have IP connectivity to the unit to be loaded with a new
version. Verify that the IP address of the PC from which you intend to
perform the upgrade belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be
upgraded (unless the unit is behind a router). If the unit is behind a
router, verify that the unit is configured with the correct Default
Gateway Address.
To view the current IP parameters of the unit, use the monitor program
by connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet and use the
following procedure:
1. From the Main Menu select 1 – Info Screens.
The Info Screens menu opens.
2. From the Info Screen menu select 2 – Show Basic Configuration.
A display of the current configuration of the basic parameters
appears, including the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default
Gateway Address parameters.
To configure any of the IP parameters, use the following procedure:
1. From the Main Menu select 3 – Basic Configuration.
The Basic Configuration menu opens.
2. To configure the IP Address, select: 1 – IP Address.
3. To configure the Subnet Mask, select 2 – Subnet Mask.
4. To configure the Default Gateway Address select 3 – Default
Gateway Address.
5. Reset the unit in order for the new configuration to apply.
NOTE:
Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause
the unit to be inoperable.
A-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
6. To verify the connection, ping the unit’s IP address. Verify that ping
replies are being received.
The procedure to be used depends on the unit’s FLASH memory type.
Identify the FLASH memory type by using the monitor program,
connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet.
From the Main Menu, select 1 – Info Screens. From the Info Screen
menu select 1 – Show Unit Status. The last line of the Unit Status
display will indicate the FLASH type (type F or type S).
Use the TFTP utility, with the following syntax, to perform the upgrade:
tftp –i hostaddress put sourcefile [destinationfile]
Where -i is for binary mode, hostaddress is the IP address of the
unit to be upgraded, put defines that the PC (client) will send a file to
the hostaddress and destinationfile is the name of the file to be
loaded.
Appendix A A-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Loading an Upgrade to a Unit
with FLASH Type: F
Use the following table to determine which source file name to use,
according to the unit’s type.
X, refers to the software version number, up to 5 decimal digits
(e.g. for software release 4.0.40, X=4040).
Use the SNMP write community <SnmpWriteCommunity>.dwn (the
default write community is private) to define the destination filename.
For example, to load the upgrade file A3011F.BS to an AU whose IP
address is 206.25.63.65 use the following syntax:
tftp –i 206.25.63.65 put A3011F.BS private.dwn
When version loading is completed the following message is displayed:
Loading operation has been completed successfully
The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is
called Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new
version is loaded into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory.
To check that the new firmware was loaded properly, view the firmware
versions stored in the FLASH using the following procedure:
1. From the Main Menu, select 2 – Unit Control.
The Unit Control menu opens.
2. From the Unit Control menu, select 5 – Flash Memory Control.
The Flash Memory Control menu opens.
Unit Type Source File Name
AU AXF.BS
SU AXF.SU
SU with Voice AXF.SUV
GU AXF.GU
NOTE:
If you are upgrading a Subscriber Unit which is not associated with an AU, the unit will
reset every five minutes (approximately) and the following message will be displayed:
FTL: file src\wpscan.c line 262 Too large number of scanning
attempts
The unit will reset and it will take more than a minute before you can re-establish the
connection to it. You should either have the SU associated with an AU before starting the
loading process or complete the loading process before the unit resets. Otherwise you
will have to try again until you complete the loading process.
A-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
3. From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S – Show Flash
Versions.
The display appears as follows:
Flash Versions
===========
Current Version: 3.0.39
Shadow Version: 4.0.40
Version After Reset:3.0.39
From the Flash Memory Control menu select the active software version,
using the following procedures:
To activate the backup (shadow) version:
1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 1 - Reset and Boot from
Shadow Version.
The Reset and Boot from Shadow Version menu opens.
2. Select 1 – Reset Now and press ENTER.
3. The unit resets and the Shadow version is used as the newactive
version. Note that after the next reset, the Current version will be
activated again.
If the active version is the Shadow version and you wish to
continue using it after the next Reset, use the following procedure:
1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 2 - Use Current Version
After Reset.
The Use Current Version After Reset menu opens.
2. Select 1 – Set As Default Now and press ENTER. This will actually
cause the names of the two versions to switch. The previous Shadow
version will now be called Current and vise versa. The following
message will be displayed:
UP (DOWN) Image FLASH will be operational (UP or DOWN
refers to the location in the flash memory).
The loading procedure is protected. An attempt to load an invalid
version (e.g. using <SnmpWriteCommunity>.fmr when trying to load a
new version to units with a FLASH Type: F) will be rejected.
Appendix A A-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Loading an Upgrade to a Unit
with FLASH Type: S
Use the following table to determine which source file name to use,
according to the unit’s type.
X refers to the software version number, up to 5 decimal digits (e.g. for
software release 4.0.40, X=4040).
Use the SNMP write community <SnmpWriteCommunity>.fmr (default
write community is private) to define the destination filename. For
example: to load the upgrade file A3011S.SU to an SU whose IP address
is 206.25.63.55 use the following syntax:
>tftp –i 206.25.63.55 put A3011S.SU private.fmr
When loading is completed the following message is displayed: Loading
operation has been completed successfully.
The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is
called Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new
version is loaded into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory.
To check that the new firmware was loaded properly, view the firmware
versions stored in the FLASH using the following procedure:
1. From the Main Menu, select 2 – Unit Control.
The Unit Control menu opens.
2. From the Unit Control menu, select 5 – Flash Memory Control.
The Flash Memory Control menu opens.
Unit Type File Name
AU AXS.BS
SU AXS.SU
SU with Voice AXS.SUV
GU AXS.GU
NOTE:
If you are upgrading a Subscriber Unit which is not associated with an AU, the unit will
reset every five minute (approximately) and the following message will be displayed:
FTL: file src\wpscan.c line 262 Too large number of scanning
attempts
The unit will reset and it will take more than a minute before you can re-establish the
connection to it. You should either have the SU associated with an AU before starting
the loading process or complete the loading process before the unit resets. Otherwise
you will have to try again until you complete the loading process.
A-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
3. From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S – Show Flash
Versions.
The display appears as follows:
Flash Versions
===========
Current Version: 3.0.39
Shadow Version: 4.0.40
Version After Reset:3.0.39
From the Flash Memory Control menu select the active software version,
using the following procedures:
To activate the backup (shadow) version:
1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 1 - Reset and Boot from
Shadow Version.
The Reset and Boot from Shadow Version menu opens.
2. Select 1 – Reset Now and press ENTER.
3. The unit resets and the Shadow version is used as the newactive
version. Note that after the next reset, the Current version will be
activated again.
If the active version is the Shadow version and you wish to
continue using it after the next Reset, use the following procedure:
1. From the Flash Memory Control menu select 2 - Use Current Version
After Reset.
The Use Current Version After Reset menu opens.
2. Select 1 – Set As Default Now and press ENTER. This will actually
cause the names of the two versions to switch. The previous Shadow
version will now be called Current and vise versa. The following
message will be displayed:
UP (DOWN) Image FLASH will be operational (UP or DOWN
refers to the location in the flash memory).
The loading procedure is protected. An attempt to load an invalid
version (e.g. using <SnmpWriteCommunity>.fmr when trying to load a
new version to units with a FLASH Type: S) will be rejected.
Appendix B:
Supported MIBs
and Traps
BreezeACCESS agents support the following MIBs:
!MIB-II (RFC1213)
!BRIDGE-MIB (RFC1286)
!BreezeCOM brzAccessMib
!BreezeCOM brzPhoneMib
!BreezeCOM brznetmib
B-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
BreezeACCESS System Object
Identifiers
Path:
breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER =1.3.6.1.4.1.710
{(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) breezecom(710)}
breezecomNewOID OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10
{breezecom 10}
breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10.2
{breezecomNewOID 2}
breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10.2.1
{breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts 1}
breezecomBreezeACCESS_General OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.10.2.2
{breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts 2}
Object OID (Location in parenthesis) Description
breezecomSU_AE_1D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 1
(710.10.2.1.1) SU-A/E-1D
breezecomSU_AE_8D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 2
(710.10.2.1.2) SU-A/E-8D
breezecomSU_AE_BD breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 3
(710.10.2.1.3) SU-A/E-BD
breezecomSU_AE_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 4
(710.10.2.1.4) SU-A/E-1D1V
breezecomSU_AE_8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 5
(710.10.2.1.5) SU-A/E-8D1V
breezecomSU_AE_BD1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 6
(710.10.2.1.6) SU-A/E-BD1V
breezecomSU_I_1D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 7
(710.10.2.1.7) SU-I-1D
breezecomSU_I_8D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 8
(710.10.2.1.8) SU-I-8D
breezecomSU_I_BD breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 9
(710.10.2.1.9) SU-I-BD
breezecomSU_I_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 10
(710.10.2.1.10) SU-I-1D1V
breezecomSU_I_8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 11
(710.10.2.1.11) SU-I-8D1V
breezecomSU_I_BD1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 12
(710.10.2.1.12) SU-I-BD1V
breezecomSU_R_1D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 13
(710.10.2.1.13) SU-R-1D
breezecomSU_R_8D breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 14
(710.10.2.1.14) SU-R-8D
breezecomSU_R_BD breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 15
(710.10.2.1.15) SU-R-BD
breezecomSU_R_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 16
(710.10.2.1.16) SU-R-1D1V
breezecomSU_R_8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 17
(710.10.2.1.17) SU-R-8D1V
Appendix B B-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
breezecomSU_R_1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 18
(710.10.2.1.18) SU-R-BD1V
breezecomAU_NI breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 19
(710.10.2.1.19) AU-NI
breezecomAU_BS breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 20
(710.10.2.1.20) AU-BS
breezecomAU_I breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 21
(710.10.2.1.21) AU-I
breezecomSU_BS breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 22
(710.10.2.1.22) SU-BS
breezecomAU_BS_WA breezecomBreezeACCESS_ACCESS 23
(710.10.2.1.23) AU-BS-WA
breezecomGU_BS breezecomBreezeACCESS_GENERAL 1
(710.10.2.2.1) GU-BS
B-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
brzAccessMIB
Path:
breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER =1.3.6.1.4.1.710
{(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) breezecom(710)}
breezecomPrvRev OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3
{breezecom 3}
brzAccessMib OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3.3
{breezecomPrvRev 3}
Note: * is used instead of the brzacc prefix
Service Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*ServiceParameters
710.3.3.1
(brzAccessMib 1)
MIR/CIR Parameters.
*MirCirOption
710.3.3.1.1
(*ServiceParameters 1)
Applicable to SU and AU only. The setting in the
AU enables/disables the MIR/CIR support
feature for all SUs served by the AU, regardless
of the setting in the SU.
The option exists in the SU only for compatibility
with AUs running SW versions 3.X and lower, in
which case the MIR/CIR support feature is
controlled at the SU.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*MirAUtoSU
710.3.3.1.2
(*ServiceParameters 2)
Applicable to SU only. Sets the Maximum
Information Rate (MIR) from AU to SU. Integer
32–2200 (Kbps)
Must be higher than *CirAUtoSU
*MirSUtoAU
710.3.3.1.3
(*ServiceParameters 3)
Applicable to SU only. Sets the Maximum
Information Rate (MIR) from SU to AU. Integer
32–2200 (Kbps)
Must be higher than *CirSUtoAU
*CirAUtoSU
710.3.3.1.4
(*ServiceParameters 4)
Applicable to SU only. Sets the Committed
Information Rate (CIR) from AU to SU. Integer
0–2200 (Kbps)
Must be lower than *MirAUtoSU
*CirSUtoAU
710.3.3.1.5
(*ServiceParameters 5)
Applicable to SU only. Sets the Committed
Information Rate (CIR) from SU to AU. Integer
0–2200 (Kbps)
Must be lower than *MirSUtoAU
*MaxDelay
710.3.3.1.6
(*ServiceParameters 6)
Applicable to SU only. Sets the maximal time
packets may be delayed by the CIR\MIR
mechanism. Above the configured maximal
period the packets are discarded.
Integer
300 – 10,000 (milliseconds)
*MaxBurstDuration
710.3.3.1.7
(*ServiceParameters 7)
Applicable to SU and AU. Sets the maximum
time during which ìinactivity bonusî time can be
accumulated for future burst transmissions.
Integer
0 – 2000 (milliseconds)
*GracefulDegradationLimit
710.3.3.1.8
(*ServiceParameters 8)
Applicable to AU only. Sets the maximum limit
for activating the graceful degradation
algorithm.
Integer
0 – 70 (%)
*RunTimeMirCirOption
710.3.3.1.9
(*ServiceParameters 9)
Applicable to SU only. Indicates the actual
status of the MIR/CIR option, which may be
different from the setting of this parameter in the
SU since it is controlled by the AU.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
Appendix B B-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
User Filtering Parameters
*MirOnlyOption
710.3.3.1.10
(*ServiceParameters 10)
Applicable only to AU when CIR/MIR option is
enabled.
When enabled, the MIR/CIR algorithm fo
determining the actual information rate is
overridden and operates only with the
configured MIR values. The graceful
degradation algorithm is disabled.
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*UserFilterParams
710.3.3. 2
(brzAccessMib 2)
Applicable to SU only. User Filtering parameters.
*UserFilterOption
710.3.3.2.1
(*UserFilterParams 1)
Applicable to SU only. Defines user-filtering options.
disable: No filtering.
iPOnly: Only IP protocol frames pass.
userDefinedAddrOnly: Only frames from user defined
IP addresses pass.
pPPoE Only: Only PPPoE frames pass.
Integer
disable (0)
iPOnly (1)
userDefinedAddrOnly(2)
pPPoEOnly (3)
na (255)
*IpFilterTable
710.3.3.2.2
(*UserFilterParams 2)
Applicable to SU only. An IP Filter Table of up to 8 user
defined addresses, or address groups, to be used if the
selected User Filtering option is
userDefinedAddrOnly. Not accessible.
*IpFilterEntry
710.3.3.2.2.1
(*IpFilterTable 1)
Applicable to SU only. An IP Filter Table entry. Not
accessible.
*IpID
710.3.3.2.2.1.1
(*IpFilterEntry 1)
Applicable to SU only. An IP address of an IP Filter
Table entry. IP Address
*MaskID
710.3.3.2.2.1.2
(*IpFilterEntry 2)
Applicable to SU only. An IP Mask of an IP Filter Table
entry.
Either a mask or a range, but not both can be used to
define an address group.
IP Address
*IpFilterRange
710.3.3.2.2.1.3
(*IpFilterEntry 3)
Applicable to SU only. An addresses range for the IP
Filter Table entry. The first address in the range is the IP
address (*iPID).
Either a mask or a range, but not both can be used to
define an address group.
Integer
0 - 255
*IpFilterIdx
710.3.3.2.2.1.4
(*IpFilterEntry 4)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. A table index for the
IP Filter Table entry. Integer
1-8
*DeleteOneUserFilter
710.3.3.2.3
(*UserFilterParams 3)
Applicable to SU only. Deletes a single selected entry
from the IP Filter Table. Integer
off (0)
firstEntry (1)
secondEntry (2)
thirdEntry (3)
fourthEntry (4)
fifthEntry (5)
sixthEntry (6)
seventhEntry (7)
eighthEntry (8)
na (255)
*DeleteAllUserFilters
710.3.3.2.4
(*UserFilterParams 4)
Applicable to SU only. Deletes all entries from the IP
Filter Table. Integer
off (0)
deleteAll (1)
off (2)
na (255)
B-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Network Management Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*NwMngParameters
710.3.3. 4
(brzAccessMib 4)
Network Management parameters.
*AccessToNwMng
710.3.3. 4.1
(*NwMngParameters 1)
Applicable to AU and SU. The port to be
used for remote management.
wlanOnly: Management E from Wireless
port only.
ethOnly: Management enabled from
Ethernet port only.
bothWlanEth: Management enabled from
both Wireless and Ethernet ports.
Integer
wlanOnly (0)
ethOnly (1)
bothWlanEth (2)
na (255)
*NwMngFilter
710.3.3. 4.2
(*NwMngParameters 2)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Disables
or enables IP address based filtering of
management messages (SNMP/Telnet/
TFTP) on one of the ports, or on both
ports.
In GU only disable and
activateOnEthPort options are available.
Integer
disable (0)
activateOnEthPort (1)
activateOnWlanPort (2)
activateOnBothWlanAndEth(3)
na (255)
mngIpFilterTable
710.3.3. 4.3
(*NwMngParameters 3)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A
Management IP Filter Table of up to 3 IP
addresses of devices that are authorized
to access the unit for management
purposes. Not accessible.
mngIpFilterEntry
710.3.3. 4.3.1
(mngIpFilterTable 1)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A
Management IP Filter Table entry. Not
accessible.
*NwMngIpAddress
710.3.3. 4.3.1.1
(mngIpFilterEntry 1)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. An IP
address in the Management IP Filter
Table.
IP address
*NwMngIpTableIdx
710.3.3. 4.3.1.2
(mngIpFilterEntry 2)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Read-only.
A table index for an entry in the
Management IP Filter Table.
Integer
1-3
*DeleteOneNwIpAddr
710.3.3. 4.4
(*NwMngParameters 4)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes a
single selected entry from the
Management IP Filter Table.
Integer
off (0)
firstEntry (1
secondEntry (2)
thirdEntry (3)
na (255)
*DeleteAllNwIpAddrs
710.3.3. 4.5
(*NwMngParameters 5)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes all
entries from the Management IP Filter
Table.
Integer
off (0)
on (1)
na (255)
*AccessToNwTrap
710.3.3. 4.6
(*NwMngParameters 6)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Enables or
disables sending of SNMP traps. Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
mngTrapTable
710.3.3. 4.7
(*NwMngParameters 7)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A
Management Trap Table of up to 3 IP
addresses of devicess to send traps to.
Not accessible.
mngTrapEntry
710.3.3. 4.7.1 (mngTrapTable 1) Applicable to AU, SU and GU. A
Management Trap Table entry. Not
accessible.
*NwMngTrapCommunity
710.3.3. 4.7.1.1
(mngTrapEntry 1)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. The trap
community associated with the
applicable entry in the Management Trap
Table.
DisplayString (SIZE(14))
Up to 14 printable ASCII characters, case
sensitive.
*NwMngTrapAddress
710.3.3. 4.7.1.2
(mngTrapEntry 2)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. An IP
address in the Management Trap Table
entry.
IP address
Appendix B B-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*NwMngTrapTableIdx
710.3.3. 4.7.1.3
(mngTrapEntry 3)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Read only.
Tables Index for an entry in the
Management Trap Table.
Integer
1-3
*DeleteOneTrapAddr
710.3.3. 4.8
(*NwMngParameters 8)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes a
single selected entry from the
Management Trap Table.
Integer
off (0)
firstEntry (1)
secondEntry (2)
thirdEntry (3)
na (255)
*DeleteAllTrapAddrs
710.3.3. 4.7.9
(*NwMngParameters 9)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Deletes all
entries from the Management Trap Table. Integer
0=off
1=on
2=off
255=na
B-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Bridge Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*BridgeParameters
710.3.3. 5
(brzAccessMib.5)
Bridge parameters.
*EthBroadcastFiltering
710.3.3. 5.1
(*BridgeParameters 1)
Applicable to SU only.
Enables/disables the filtering of Ethernet
(layer2) broadcasts.
disable: No filtering.
ethOnly: Filter broadcasts received on the
Ethernet port only.
wlanOnly: Filter broadcasts received on the
Wlan port only.
bothWlanAndEth: Filter broadcasts received
on both ports.
Integer
disable (0)
ethOnly (1)
wlanOnly (2)
bothWlanAndEth(3)
na (255)
*VLANSupport
710.3.3. 5.2
(*BridgeParameters 2)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. VLAN Support
Parameters.
*VlanID
710.3.3. 5.2.1
(*VLANSupport 1)
Applicable to SU only. VLAN ID for data frame
tagging. Applicable to Access Link only. Integer
1-4094.
0 means not applicable
*EthernetLinkType
710.3.3. 5.2.2
(*VLANSupport 2)
Applicable to AU and SU. VLAN support
mode (Link Type).
The Access Link option is not available for AU.
Integer
accessLink (1)
trunkLink (2)
hybridLink (3)
*ManagementVID
710.3.3. 5.2.5
(*VLANSupport 5)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. VLAN ID for
management frame tagging. For SUs with
voice support it is also used for tagging voice
frames (RTP packets).
Integer
1-4094
65535 means no VLAN
tagging.
*VoicePriorityTag
710.3.3. 5.2.6
(*VLANSupport 6)
Applicable to SU with voice only. Enables
prioritization tagging of voice (RTP) frames
according to IEEE 802.1p when
*ManagementVID is 65535 (No VLAN).
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*VLANForwarding
710.3.3. 5.2.7
(*VLANSupport 7)
VLAN Forwarding Feature Parameters
*VlanForwardingSupport
710.3.3. 5.2.7.1
(*VLANForwarding 1)
Applicable to AU and SU. Enables or disables
VLAN Forwarding. (applicable in Trunk links
only)
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*VlanForwardingTable
710.3.3. 5.2.7.2
(*VLANForwarding 2)
Applicable to AU and SU. A VLAN Forwarding
Table of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to
which data frames are forwarded when VLAN
Forwarding is Enabled. (applicable in Trunk
links only). Not accessible.
*VlanForwardingEntry
710.3.3. 5.2.7.2.1
(*VlanForwardingTable 1)
Applicable to AU and SU. A VLAN Forwarding
Table entry. (applicable in Trunk links only).
Not accessible.
*VlanForwardingIdx
710.3.3. 5.2.7.2.1.1
(*VlanForwardingEntry 1)
Applicable to AU and SU. A read only table
index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN
Forwarding Table.
Integer
0 - 19
*VlanIdForwarding
710.3.3. 5.2.7.2.1.2
(*VlanForwardingEntry 2)
Applicable to AU and SU. The list of VLAN
ID's in the VLAN ID Forwarding Table. To
Remove a VLAN ID - SET the corresponding
entry to 0. To Add a new VLAN ID SET an
entry which is currently 0.
Integer
1-4094
0=remove entry.
*VLANRelaying
710.3.3. 5.2.8
(*VLANSupport 8)
VLAN Relaying Feature Parameters
Appendix B B-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*VlanRelayingSupport
710.3.3. 5.2.8.1
(*VLANRelaying 1)
Applicable to AU only. Enables or disables
VLAN Relaying. (applicable in Trunk links
only)
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*VlanRelayingTable
710.3.3. 5.2.8.2
(*VLANRelaying 2)
Applicable to AU only. A VLAN Relaying Table
of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data
frames are relayed when VLAN Relaying is
Enabled. (applicable in Trunk links only). Not
accessible.
*VlanRelayingEntry
710.3.3. 5.2.8.2.1
(*VlanRelayingTable 1)
Applicable to AU only. A VLAN Relaying Table
entry. (applicable in Trunk links only). Not
accessible.
*VlanRelayingIdx
710.3.3. 5.2.8.2.1.1
(*VlanRelayingEntry) 1
Applicable to AU only. A read only table index
for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Relaying Table. Integer
0 - 19
*VlanIdRelaying
710.3.3. 5.2.8.2.1.2
(*VlanRelayingEntry 2)
Applicable to AU only. The list of VLAN ID's in
the VLAN ID Relaying Table. To Remove a
VLAN ID - SET the corresponding entry to 0.
To Add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is
currently 0.
Integer
1-4094
0=remove entry.
*VLANTrafficPriority
710.3.3. 5.2.9
(*VLANSupport 9)
VLAN Traffic Priority Parameters
*VlanDataPriority
710.3.3. 5.2.9.1
(*VLANTrafficPriority 1)
Applicable to SU only.
Priority tagging for data frames. Applicable to
Access Link only.
Integer
0 – 7
na (255)
*VlanVoicePriority
710.3.3. 5.2.9.2
(*VLANTrafficPriority 2)
Applicable to SU with voice only. Priority
tagging for voice frames. Applicable to Access
Link and Trunk Link only.
Integer
0 – 7
na (255)
*VlanManagementPriority
710.3.3. 5.2.9.3
(*VLANTrafficPriority 3)
Applicable to AU, SU and GU. Priority tagging
for management frames. Applicable to units
with a *ManagementVID other than 65535.
Integer
0 – 7
na (255)
*PriorityQueueThreshold
710.3.3. 5.2.9.4
(*VLANTrafficPriority 4)
Applicable to AU and SU. Priority threshold for
tagged frames received from Ethernet port.
Applicable to Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only.
Integer
0 – 7
na (255)
*BridgeAgingTime
710.3.3. 5.3
(*BridgeParameters 3)
Applicable to AU and SU. Bridge aging time
for devices learned from both the Ethernet and
wireless link ports.
Integer
100 – 2000
(seconds)
*LanToWirelessLinkBridgeMode
710.3.3. 5.4
(*BridgeParameters 4)
Applicable to AU only.
Controls the flow of information from Ethernet
to Wlan.
rejectUnknown: Permits only transmission to
addresses known to be on the Wlan side.
forwardUnknown: Forwards all frames, except
those sent to addresses known to be on the
Ethernet side.
Integer
rejectUnknown (0)
forwardUnknown (1)
na (255)
*BroadcastRelaying
710.3.3. 5.5
(*BridgeParameters 5)
Applicable to AU only.
Enables/disables the relaying of broadcast
messages to the wireless link.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*UnicastRelaying
710.3.3. 5.6
(*BridgeParameters 6)
Applicable to AU only.
Enables/disables the relaying of unicast
messages to the wireless link.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*EthBroadcastingParameters
710.3.3. 5.7
(*BridgeParameters 7)
Applicable to SU only. Ethernet Broadcasting
parameters.
*DHCPBroadcastOverrideFilter
710.3.3. 5.7.1
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 1)
Applicable to SU only. Enables or disables the
broadcasting of DHCP messages, overriding
the general *EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet
broadcast filtering option
Integer
no (0)
yes (1)
na (255)
* PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFilter
710.3.3. 5.7.2
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 2)
Applicable to SU only. Enables or disables the
broadcasting of PPPoE messages, overriding
the general *EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet
broadcast filtering option.
Integer
no (0)
yes (1)
na (255)
B-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
* ARPBroadcastOverrideFilter
710.3.3. 5.7.3
(*EthBroadcastingParameters 3)
Applicable to SU only. Enables or disables the
broadcasting of ARP messages, overriding
the general *EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet
broadcast filtering option.
Integer
no (0)
yes (1)
na (255)
*ToSPriorityParameters
710.3.3. 5.8
(*BridgeParameters 8)
*VoicePacketsToS
710.3.3. 5.8.1
(*ToSPriorityParameters 1)
Applicable to SU with voice only.
The Type of Service value to be inserted in the
IP header of voice (RTP) packets.
Integer
0-255
*ToSPrecedenceThreshold
710.3.3. 5.8.2
(*ToSPriorityParameters 2)
Applicable to SU and AU only. Priority
threshold (based on the ToS) for frames
received from Ethernet port.
Integer
0-7
Appendix B B-11
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Air Interface Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*AirInterface
710.3.3. 6
(brzAccessMib 6)
*ESSID
710.3.3. 6.1
(*AirInterface 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. The
Extended Service Set ID (ESSID)
used to prevent the merging of
collocated systems. Accessible
only with SNMP Write Community.
DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII
characters.
*AckDelayLimit
710.3.3. 6.2
(*AirInterface 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Defines
the maximum time the unit waits for
an Acknowledgment (ACK)
message before retransmission.
Defining a higher range causes the
unit to wait a longer time for ACKs
before retransmission.
Low: Up to 10km
Medium: Up to 20km
High: Greater than 20km.
Integer
Low (0)
Medium (1)
High (2)
na (255)
*FreqOffset
710.3.3. 6.3
(*AirInterface 3)
Applicable to SU and AU in
BreezeACCESS XL family. Not
applicable to units that support only
Flexible Hopping Definition for
setting the hopping frequencies
(e.g. 3.3a band). Not applicable in
Flexible Hopping Definition mode.
Determines the beginning of the
actual hopping band or single
channel frequency relative to the
beginning of the radio band.
Start of hopping band (channel) =
Start of radio band+2 X Frequency
Offset
Integer
na (255)
The valid range of values is dependent on
the bandwidth of the radio and on the
selected Hopping Band.
Max. Frequency Offset = [Overall radio
bandwidth-Hopping Band]/2
*TransmitDiversity
710.3.3. 6.4
(*AirInterface 4)
Applicable to SU-R, SU-I and AU-I
units only.
Enables the selection of the
antenna(s) to be used for
transmission.
Integer
use2Antennasn (0)
antenna1 (1)
antenna2 (2)
na (255)
*HoppingSequence
710.3.3. 6.5
(*AirInterface 5)
Applicable to AU in
BreezeACCESS II family only.
Determines the hopping sequence
to be used. Different AUs in the
same geographical area should use
different Hopping Sequences from
the same Hopping Set.
The valid range is dependant on
the Country Standard.
Integer
Na (255)
Australia: 1-20
Canada: 1-10
Europe ETSI: 1-26
France: 1-11
Israel: 1-11
Japan: 1-4
Korea: 1-4
Netherlands: 1-5
Spain: 1-9
US FCC: 1-26
Mexico: 1-10
International: 1-26
*HoppingSet
710.3.3. 6.6
(*AirInterface 6)
Applicable to AU in
BreezeACCESS II family only.
Determines the hopping set to be
used. All AUs in the same
geographical area should use the
same Hopping Set.
Integer
1-3
na (255)
B-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*HoppingSync
710.3.3. 6.7
(*AirInterface 7)
Applicable to BS-AU only.
Inter-AU hopping sync functionality
of the unit.
In the BreezeACCESS II family,
synchronization among AUs is not
available with the following Country
Standards: US FCC, Australia,
Canada.
In the BreezeACCESS V family,
synchronization is not available if
the selected hopping band is
ISM US FCC.
Integer
idle (0)
slave (1)
master (2)
na (255)
*HoppingShift
710.3.3. 6.8
(*AirInterface 8)
Applicable to AU in
BreezeACCESS V, XL and MMDS
families and in BreezeACCESS II if
*HoppingBands is
frqFlexibleHopping.
Defines a hopping pattern different
from the basic hopping sequence
(Hopping Shift=0). Different
collocated AUs should use different
hopping shifts.
Integer
na (255)
Range 0 to [number of operational
channels-1]
Appendix B B-13
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*HoppingBands
710.3.3. 6.9
(*AirInterface 9)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
In BreezeACCESS II this is read-
only, showing the Country Standard
set in the factory.
In BreezeACCESS MMDS it is
read-only, showing Flexible
Hopping Definition.
In BreezeACCESS XL products
that support only Flexible Hopping
Definition for setting the hopping
frequencies (e.g. 3.3a band), it is
read-only, showing Flexible
Hopping Definition.
In other BreezeACCESS XL
products, supporting the use of the
Hopping Band parameter for setting
the hopping frequencies, this is
read-write, enabling the selection of
a fixed Hopping Band, Single
Channel operation or Flexible
Hopping Definition.
In BreezeACCESS V units that are
configured to support only
ISM US FCC hopping standard, it is
read-only. Otherwise it is read-
write, supporting the selection of
ISM US FCC, ISM International
and Flexible Hopping Definition,
Integer
na (255)
The available values represent settings that
are dependent on the specific radio band.
BreezeACCESS II (read only):
frqSiteProprietary (3)
frqISMEuropeETSI (4)
frqISMUsFCC (5)
frqISMJapan (6)
frqISMKorea (7)
frqISMAustralia (8)
frqISMIsrael (9)
frqISMNetherlands (11)
frqISMFrance (12)
frqISMSpain (13)
frqISMCanada (14)
frqInternational (22)
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
frqSingleChannel2_4GHz (41)
frqISMMexico (67)
MMDS (read only):
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
BreezeACCESS 2.6b:
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence10MHz (44)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence12MHz (45)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence14MHz (46)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence24MHz (47)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence28MHz (48)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence36MHz (49)
frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence42MHz (50)
frqSingleChannel2_6Ghz (51)
BreezeACCESS 3.3a, 3.6b: (read only)
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
BreezeACCESS 3.5a:
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence10MHz (15)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence12MHz (16)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence14MHz (17)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MHz (18)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence28MHz (19)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence36MHz (20)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence42MHz (21)
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
frqSingleChannel3_5GHz (40)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprie
tary(69)
BreezeACCESS 3.5a1:
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence10MHz (23)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence12MHz (24)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence14MHz (25)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence24MHz (26)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence28MHz (27)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence36MHz (28)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence42MHz (29)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence50MHz (33)
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
frqSingleChannel3_5a1GHz (39)
frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence24MhzPropri
etary(70)
BreezeACCESS 3.5b, 3.5ab:
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence10MHz (15)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence12MHz (16)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence14MHz (17)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MHz (18)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence28MHz (19)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence36MHz (20)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence42MHz (21)
frq3_5bGHzHoppingSequence50MHz (32)
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
frqSingleChannel3_5GHz (40)
frq3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprie
tary(69)
BreezeACCESS 3.8:
frq3_8GHzBand1 (0)
frq3_8GHzSelectable (1)
frq3_8GHzApprovalSpectrumMask (2)
frqFlexibleHopping (37)
frqSingleChannel3_8GHz (42)
BreezeACCESS V
frg5_7GHzISMUsFCC(74)
frg5_7GHzInternational(75)
frg5_7GHzFlexibleHopping(37)
B-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*MaxDataRate
710.3.3. 6.10
(*AirInterface 10)
Applicable to SU and AU. The
maximum transmission data rate. Integer
max1Mbps (1)
max2Mbps (2)
max3Mbps (3)
na (255)
*TransmitPowerControl
710.3.3. 6.11
(*AirInterface 11)
Applicable to IF based units (AU-A/
E and SU-A/E) only. Enables
reducing the transmit power level.
The maximum available value is for
maximum power. A lower value
reduces the transmitted power. The
resulting transmit power level
depends on the maximum power
supported by the unit and on the
attenuation of the IF cable.
Integer
BreezeACCESS II, XL and MMDS: 0-15
BreezeACCESS V: 0-7
na (255)
*RxAttenuationControl
710.3.3. 6.12
(*AirInterface 12)
Applicable to IF-based SU (SU-A/
E) only.
Enables to set the attenuation in
the receive path to 0, 10 or 25dB.
The effect of inserting such
attenuation in the receive circuit is
equivalent to reducing the level of
the received signal (including both
signal and noise) by 2dB when
selecting 10dB attenuation and
12dB when selecting 25dB
attenuation.
Integer
low0dB (0)
med10dB (1)
high25dB (2)
na (255)
*MaximumVoiceSessions
710.3.3. 6.14
(*AirInterface 14)
Applicable to AU only.
The maximum number of
simultaneous voice sessions
permitted to guarantee minimum
quality.
Integer
0-50
na (255)
*FlexSubBandDef
710.3.3. 6.15
(*AirInterface 15)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Flexible Hopping Definition
parameters.
*AddSubBand
710.3.3. 6.15.1
(*FlexSubBandDef 1)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
In BreezeACCESS II, V and MMDS
families it adds sub-bands (f1-f2) or
discrete frequencies to the list of
sub-bands/frequencies to be used
for generating the basic Hopping
Sequence after the next reset.
In BreezeACCESS XL it defines a
new set of sub-bands/frequencies
to be used for generating the basic
Hopping Sequence after the next
reset.
DisplayString (SIZE(244))
Up to 244 printable ASCII characters.
Use either MHZ resolution ìaaaaî or kHz
resolution ìaaaa.bbbî.
Use a hyphen between two entries defining a
sub-band. Use a comma between sub-bands
and/or discrete frequency entries. Do not use
spaces.
*DelSubBand
710.3.3. 6.15.2
(*FlexSubBandDef 2)
Applicable to SU and AU in
BreezeACCESS II, V and MMDS
families only.
Deletes sub-bands (f1-f2) or
discrete frequencies from the list of
sub-bands/frequencies to be used
for generating the basic Hopping
Sequence after the next reset.
DisplayString (SIZE(244))
Up to 244 printable ASCII characters.
Use either MHZ resolution ìaaaaî or kHz
resolution ìaaaa.bbbî.
Use a hyphen between two entries defining a
sub-band. Use a comma between sub-bands
and/or discrete frequency entries. Do not use
spaces.
*ErazeAllSubBands
710.3.3. 6.15.3
(*FlexSubBandDef 3)
Applicable to SU and AU in
BreezeACCESS II, V and MMDS
families only.
Deletes all entries from the table of
the frequencies to be used.
Integer
eraseAll (0)
noOperation (1)
na (255)
*SubBandTable
710.3.3. 6.15.4
(*FlexSubBandDef 4)
Applicable to SU and AU only. The
list of sub-bands to be supported
after next reset. Not accessible.
*SubBandEntry
710.3.3. 6.15.4.1
(*SubBandTable 1)
Applicable to SU and AU only. A
Sub-Band Table entry. Not
accessible.
*SubBand
710.3.3. 6.15.4.1.1
(*SubBandEntry 1)
Applicable only to SW version 2.6.
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A Sub-Band in the Sub-
Bands Table.
Integer
Appendix B B-15
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*SubBandsTableIdx
710.3.3. 6.15.4.1.2
(*SubBandEntry 2)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A Sub-Band Table entry
index.
Integer
*SubBandExp
710.3.3. 6.15.4.1.3
(*SubBandEntry 3)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A Sub-Band in the Sub-
Bands Table.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
*CurrentHoppingSeqTable
710.3.3. 6.15.5
(*FlexSubBandDef 5)
Applicable to SU and AU only. The
list of hopping frequencies in the
Current Hopping Sequence. Not
accessible.
*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry
710.3.3. 6.15.5.1
(*CurrentHoppingSeqTable 1)
Applicable to SU and AU only. A
Current Hopping Sequence Table
entry. Not accessible.
*HopSeqSubBand
710.3.3. 6.15.5.1.1
(*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 1)
Applicable only to SW version 2.6.
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A frequency in the
Current Hopping Sequence Table.
Integer
*CurrHopSeqTableIdx
710.3.3. 6.15.5.1.2
(*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 2)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A Current Hopping
Sequence Table index.
Integer
*CurrSubBandExp
710.3.3. 6.15.5.1.3
*CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 3)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A frequency in the
Current Hopping Sequence Table.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
*ChannelSpacing
710.3.3. 6.15.5
(*FlexSubBandDef 5)
Applicable to SU and AU in
BreezeACCESS XL family only.
Applicable only in Flexible Hopping
Definition mode. Defines the
minimum distances between two
frequencies. (Not available in some
products that only support a 2MHz
Channel Spacing)
Integer
space1_75MHz (0)
space1MHz (1)
space2MHz (2)
na (255)
*AddFlexHopChannels
710.3.3. 6.15.7
(*FlexSubBandDef 7)
Applicable to SU and AU in
BreezeACCESS MMDS family only.
Adds MMDS channels to the list of
channels to be used.
DisplayString (SIZE(244))
Up to 244 printable ASCII characters in one
of the following formats:
1. A1
2. B2,C3,G4 (no spaces)
*DelFlexHopChannels
710.3.3. 6.15.8
(*FlexSubBandDef 8)
Applicable to SU and AU in
BreezeACCESS MMDS family only.
Deletes MMDS channels from the
list of channels to be used.
DisplayString (SIZE(244))
Up to 244 printable ASCII characters in one
of the following formats:
1. A1
2. B2,C3,G4 (no spaces)
*ScramblingDefinition
710.3.3. 6.15.9
(*FlexSubBandDef 9)
Applicable to SU and AU.
Scrambling parameters.
*ScramblingMode
710.3.3. 6.15.9.1
(*ScramblingDefinition 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. The
method of scrambling the
frequencies defined in the Flexible
Hopping Definition process for
generating the basic hopping
sequence.
Standard mode - this mode
automatically scrambles the
frequencies according to the
algorithm used in SW version 3.x
and lower. It is suitable for up to 6
frequencies.
Enhanced mode - this mode
automatically scrambles the
frequencies according to a new
algorithm.
Manual mode - The user defines
the hopping sequence using the
frequencies indexes.
Integer
standardMode (1)
manualMode (2)
enhancedMode(3)
*ManualSequenceDefinition
710.3.3. 6.15.9.2
(*ScramblingDefinition 2)
Applicable to SU and AU.
Manual scrambling definition.
Configuring the sequence using the
frequenciesí indexes.
Display String.
Up to 244 printable ASCII characters.
Allowed Range of Indexes: '1' to 'Number of
Channels'.
Sequence Length must be equal to 'Number
of Channels'.
Use a comma to separate between entries.
B-16 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*EraseManualSequence
710.3.3. 6.15.9.3
(*ScramblingDefinition 3)
Applicable to SU and AU. Erase the
manually configured sequence. Integer
cancelOperation (0)
eraseAll (1)
*SpanningFactor
710.3.3. 6.15.9.4
(*ScramblingDefinition 4)
Applicable to AU only. The
Spanning Factor to be used by the
Enhanced Scrambling mechanism.
The Spanning Factor should be
chosen so that the GCD (Greater
Common Divisor) of the Spanning
Factor and the Number of
Frequencies would be 1 (e.g. for 8
frequencies possible values for the
Spanning Factor are 1, 3, 5 and 7).
The SU learns the value of the
Spanning Factor from the AU.
Integer
From 1 to ‘Number of Frequencies’, provided
it meets the GCD requirement.
*ScrambledSeqTable
710.3.3. 6.15.9.5
(*ScramblingDefinition 5)
Applicable to SU and AU only. The
scrambled sequence to be
supported after next reset. Not
accessible.
*ScrambledSeqEntry
710.3.3. 6.15. 9.5.1
(*ScrambledSeqTable 1)
Applicable to SU and AU only. A
Scrambled Sequence Table entry.
Not accessible.
*ScrambledSeqTableIdx
710.3.3. 6.15. 9.5.1.1
(**ScrambledSeqEntry 1)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A Scrambled Sequence
Table entry index.
Integer
*ScrambledSeqFreqIdx
710.3.3. 6.15. 9.5.1.2
(**ScrambledSeqEntry 2)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Read-only. A Frequency Index in
the Scrambled Sequence Table.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
*CallAgingTime
710.3.3. 6.16
(*AirInterface 16)
Applicable to AU only. The aging
time for a voice call in the Call Info
database.
Integer
1-50,000 (seconds)
1=No aging
*SecurityParameters
710.3.3. 6.17
(*AirInterface 17)
Security Parameters
*PrivacyOptionImplemented
710.3.3. 6.17.1
(*SecurityParameters 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read
Only. Enable/disable the privacy
option. Normally set to active.
Integer
notActive (0)
active (1)
*AuthenticationAlgorithm
710.3.3. 6.17.2
(*SecurityParameters 2)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Enables/disables the authentication
option.
openSystem: authentication
messages are not encrypted.
sharedKey: Authentication
messages are encrypted.
Integer
openSystem (0)
sharedKey (1)
*DefaultKeyID
710.3.3. 6.17.3
(*SecurityParameters 3)
Applicable to SU and AU only. The
ID of the key to be used for
encryption the authentication
messages.
Integer
1-4
*WEPKey1
710.3.3. 6.17.4
(*SecurityParameters 4)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Encryption WEP Key#1. Accessible
only with SNMP Write Community.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
Ten hexadecimal digits
*WEPKey2
710.3.3. 6.17.5
(*SecurityParameters 5)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Encryption WEP Key#2. Accessible
only with SNMP Write Community.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
Ten hexadecimal digits
*WEPKey3
710.3.3. 6.17.6
(*SecurityParameters 6)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Encryption WEP Key#3. Accessible
only with SNMP Write Community.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
Ten hexadecimal digits
*WEPKey4
710.3.3. 6.17.7
(*SecurityParameters 7)
Applicable to SU and AU only.
Encryption WEP Key#4. Accessible
only with SNMP Write Community.
DisplayString (SIZE(10))
Ten hexadecimal digits.
Appendix B B-17
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*CurrentTxPwrLvl
710.3.3. 6.18
(*AirInterface 18)
Applicable to SU-R, SU-I and AU-I
units only.
Enables setting the transmitted
power level according to the unit
capabilities.
The medium (2) value is not
applicable to SU-I and AU-I and to
some SU-R products.
Integer
Low (0)
high (1)
medium (2)
*WirelessTrapThreshold
710.3.3. 6.19
(*AirInterface 19)
A wireless link quality threshold for
sending the
*WirelessStatusTRAP,or
*WirelessStatusOfSUsTRAP.
These traps indicate whether the
quality has gone below or above
the specified threshold.
Integer
SU: 0-255 (RSSI units)
AU: 0-100
(% retransmissions)
*NumberOfHoppingFrequenciess
710.3.3. 6.20
(*AirInterface 20)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-
only. The Number of Hopping
Frequencies used in the AU.
Integer
0-99
na (255)
*OperatorESSID
710.3.3. 6.21
(*AirInterface 21)
Applicable to AU only. A secondary
ESSID to support upgrade of
existing installations. All AUs in the
region should be configured to the
same Operator ESSID to allow a
new SU to associate with any AU.
DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case
sensitive.
*RunTimeESSID
710.3.3. 6.22
(*AirInterface 22)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
The ESSID of the associated AU. DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case
sensitive.
*BestAu
710.3.3. 6.23
(*AirInterface 23)
Best AU Parameters
*BestAuSupport
710.3.3. 6.23.1
(*BestAu 1)
Applicable to SU only. Disable/
enable the Best AU selection
mechanism.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts
710.3.3. 6.23.2
(*BestAu 2)
Applicable to SU only. The number
of scanning attempts to collect
information for the Best AU
decision.
Integer
1 – 255
*NeighborAuTable
710.3.3. 6.23.3
(*BestAu 3)
Applicable to SU only. A table of
data on neighboring AUs. Not
accessible.
*NeighborAuEntry
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1
(*NeighborAuTable 1)
Applicable to SU only. An entry in
the Neighbor AU Table. Not
accessible.
*NeighborAuMacAdd
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.1
(*NeighborAuEntry 1)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. A
MAC address of an AU in the
Neighbor AU Table.
MAC address
*NeighborAuESSID
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.2
(*NeighborAuEntry 2)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
The ESSID of an AU in the
Neighbor AU Table.
DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable ASCII characters, case
sensitive.
*NeighborAuRssi
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.3
(*NeighborAuEntry 3)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
The received signal strength in
RSSI units of an AU in the
Neighbor AU Table.
Integer
*NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.4
(*NeighborAuEntry 4)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
Neighbor AU association load
status in the Neighbor AU Table.
Integer
notFull (0)
full (1)
na (255)
*NeighborAuMark
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.5
(*NeighborAuEntry 5)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
Neighbor AU mark in the Neighbor
AU Table.
Integer
*NeighborAuIdx
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.6
(*NeighborAuEntry 6)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
An index of an entry in the
Neighbor AU Table.
Integer
B-18 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*NeighborAuDbm
710.3.3. 6.23.3.1.7
(*NeighborAuEntry 7)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only.
The received signal strength in
dBm of an AU in the Neighbor AU
Table.
Integer
*PreferredAuMacAddress
710.3.3. 6.23.5
(*BestAu 5)
Applicable to SU only. The MAC
address of the preferred AU
(overriding the Best AU selection
process. 00...00 (all zeros in
address) means no preferred AU is
set.
MAC Address
*TransmitLevel
710.3.3. 6.24
(*AirInterface 24)
For future use in SU-I and AU-I.
Sets the level in dBm of the
transmitted power at the antenna
port.
Integer
0-21
na (255)
*ACSEParameters
710.3.3. 6.27
(*AirInterface 27)
Applicable for AU, SU and GU.
ACSE Voice Scheduler
parameters.
*ACSEOption
710.3.3. 6.27.1
(*ACSEParameters 1)
Applicable for AU, SU and GU.
Read-only in the SU. Disable/
enable the ACSE Voice Scheduler
mechanism.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
*ACSEDwellTime
710.3.3. 6.27.2
(*ACSEParameters 2)
Applicable for AU, SU and GU.
Read-only. The dwell time when the
*ACSEOption is enabled. Currently
set to 60 milliseconds.
Integer
60 (mseconds)
na (255)
*ACSEMaximumVoiceSessions
710.3.3. 6.27.3
(*ACSEParameters 3)
Applicable to AU only.
The maximum number of
simultaneous ACSE voice sessions
permitted to guarantee minimum
quality. Applicable only when the
*ACSEOption is enabled.
Integer
0-15
na (255)
*ACSENumberOfDataRetransmissions
710.3.3. 6.27.4
(*ACSEParameters 4)
Applicable to SU and AU.
Maximum times to retransmit an
unacknowledged data packet.
Applicable only when the
*ACSEOption is enabled.
Integer
0-100
*ACSENumberOfVoiceRetransmissions
710.3.3. 6.27.5
(*ACSEParameters 5)
Applicable to SU with voice and
AU. Maximum times to retransmit
an unacknowledged voice packet.
Applicable only when the
*ACSEOption is enabled.
Integer
0-100
*OperatorESSIDOption
710.3.3. 6.28
(*AirInterface 28)
Applicable for AU only. The
Enabling/disabling the use of the
Operator ESSID.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*MaxNumOfAssociations
710.3.3. 6.29
(*AirInterface 29)
Sets the upper limit for the number
of Subscriber Units that can be
associated with the AU.
Integer
0-512
* SiteProprietary
710.3.3. 6.31
(*AirInterface 31)
Site Proprietary parameters.
Applicable only to BreezeACCESS
II SU and AU configured to work in
the special Site Proprietary hopping
standard.
*SPNumOfFreqs
710.3.3. 6.31.1
(* SiteProprietary 1)
Number of frequencies in the
proprietary hopping sets
parameters.
*FirstSetNumOfFreqs
710.3.3. 6.31.1.1
(*SPNumOfFreqs 1)
Read-Only. Number of frequencies
in the first set. Integer
na (255)
*SecondSetNumOfFreqs
710.3.3. 6.31.1.2
(*SPNumOfFreqs 2)
Read-Only. Number of frequencies
in the second set. Integer
na (255)
*ThirdSetNumOfFreqs
710.3.3. 6.31.1.3
(*SPNumOfFreqs 3)
Read-Only. Number of frequencies
in the third set. Integer
na (255)
Appendix B B-19
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*SPFreqs
710.3.3. 6.31.2
(* SiteProprietary 2)
Site Proprietary frequencies
parameters.
*SPFreqsTable
710.3.3. 6.31.2.1
(*SPFreqs 1)
A table of frequencies in the Site
Proprietary hopping sets. Not
accessible.
sPFreqsEntry
710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1
(*SPFreqsTable 1)
An entry in the table of frequencies
in the Site Proprietary hopping sets.
Not accessible.
sPFreqIdx
710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.1
(sPFreqsEntry 1)
A index of an entry in the able of
frequencies in the Site Proprietary
hopping sets. Read Only.
Integer
sPFirstSetFreq
710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.2
(sPFreqsEntry 2)
A frequency in the first Site
Proptietary hopping set. Read Only. Integer
sPSecondSetFreq
710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.3
(sPFreqsEntry 3)
A frequency in the second Site
Proptietary hopping set. Read Only. Integer
sPThirdSetFreq
710.3.3. 6.31.2.1.1.3
(sPFreqsEntry 3)
A frequency in the third Site
Proptietary hopping set. Read Only. Integer
B-20 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Performance Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*PerformanceParams
710.3.3. 7
(brzAccessMib 7)
*NumOfRetransmissions
710.3.3. 7.1
(*PerformanceParams 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Maximum
times to retransmit an unacknowledged
packet. Applicable only when the
*ACSEOption is disabled.
Integer
0-100
*NumOfDwellToRetransmit
710.3.3. 7.2
(*PerformanceParams 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Minimum dwell
periods during which an
unacknowledged packet is retransmitted.
Integer
0-9
*NumOfRetransToDecRate
710.3.3. 7.3
(*PerformanceParams 3)
Applicable to SU and AU. Number of
unsuccessful retransmissions to
decrease the transmission rate.
Integer
0-10
*MinContentionWin
710.3.3. 7.5
(*PerformanceParams 5)
Applicable to SU and AU. Determines
the size of the contention window, which
is the time to wait before transmission for
collision avoidance.
Integer
7-255.
*MaxMulticastRate
710.3.3. 7.6
(*PerformanceParams 6)
Applicable to SU and AU. Maximum rate
for transmission of multicast and
broadcast messages.
Integer
max1Mbps (1)
max2Mbps (2)
max3Mbps (3)
na (255)
*CarrierSenseLevel
710.3.3. 7.7
(*PerformanceParams 7)
Applicable to SU and AU. Threshold
level for decision on existence of a
carrier signal, indicating a transmission
from another unit.
DisplayString
-255 to +255 (dB)
*DwellTime
710.3.3. 7.9
(*PerformanceParams 9)
Applicable to AU and GU.
The time spent on each radio channel
(hop). Applicable only when the
*ACSEOption is disabled.
Integer
t32KiloMicroseconds(32)
t64KiloMicroseconds(64)
t128KiloMicroseconds(128)
na (255)
*RTSThreshold
710.3.3. 7.10
(*PerformanceParams 10)
Applicable to SU and AU. The minimum
frame size that requires an RTS/CTS
handshake.
Integer
20-1600 (bytes)
*MultiRate
710.3.3. 7.11
(*PerformanceParams 11)
Applicable to SU and AU. Multi-Rate
parameters
*MultiRateSupport
710.3.3. 7.11.1
(*MultiRate 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Enables/
disables the multi-Rate decision
mechanism.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*MultiRateDecisionWinSize
710.3.3. 7.11.2
(*MultiRate 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. The size of the
decision window for the multi-Rate
mechanism (the number of consecutive
transmission or retransmission
attempts).
Integer
1-50
na (255)
*NoOfFailuresInDecisionWindow
710.3.3. 7.11.3
(*MultiRate 3)
Applicable to SU and AU. The number of
failures in the decision window that will
cause the window to be defined as
unsuccessful.
Integer
1 to Decision Window Size.
na (255)
*GpsHoppingParams
710.3.3. 7.12
(*PerformanceParams 12)
GPS Hopping Parameters
*NumberOfHoppingFreqs
710.3.3. 7.12.1
(*GpsHoppingParams 1)
Applicable to GU Only. The Number of
Hopping Frequencies used in the AUs
controlled by the GU.
Integer
0-99
na (255)
Appendix B B-21
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*SyncSignalSource
710.3.3. 7.12.1
(*GpsHoppingParams 2)
Applicable to GU Only. The source of the
synchronization signal.
When using a single GU, it should
always be configured to 1
(gPSAntennaOrInternal).
When using several daisy-chained units
and a GPS Antenna is connected to the
first unit, than all units should be
configured to 1 (gPSAntennaOrInternal).
When using several daisy-chained units
without a GPS antenna, than the first
unit that generates the self-
synchronization signals for all other units
should be configured to 1
(gPS_AntennaOrInternal). All other units
that receive the synchronization signals
from the first unit should be configured to
2 (localFromOtherGU ).
Integer
gpsAntennaOrInternal (1)
localFromOtherGU (2)
na (255)
B-22 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Site Survey Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*SiteSurvey
710.3.3. 8
(brzAccessMib 8)
PerHopStatisticsTable
710.3.3. 8.1
(*SiteSurvey 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Statistics
accumulated since last reset and average RSSI
per frequency for all hopping frequencies in the
(sequence). Not Accessible.
hopSeqEntry
710.3.3. 8.1.1
(perHopStatisticsTable 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. A Per Hop Statistics
Table entry. Not accessible.
wPperHopStatisticsTable
710.3.3. 8.1.1.1
(hopSeqEntry 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
channel number according to the hopping
sequence.
Integer
hopTracerRx
710.3.3. 8.1.1.2
(hopSeqEntry 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
accumulated number of frames received since
last reset at the applicable frequency.
Integer
hopTracerTx
710.3.3. 8.1.1.3
(hopSeqEntry 3)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
accumulated number of frames transmitted since
last reset at the applicable frequency.
Integer
hopTracerRetries
710.3.3. 8.1.1.4
(hopSeqEntry 4)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
accumulated number of frames retransmitted
since last reset at the applicable frequency.
Integer
hopTracerRSSI
710.3.3. 8.1.1.5
(hopSeqEntry 5)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
average RSSI of frames received at the
applicable frequency.
DisplayString (SIZE(20))
* hopTracerFreq
710.3.3. 8.1.1.6
(hopSeqEntry 6)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
frequency in MHz of the entry. DisplayString (SIZE(9))
*TrafficStatistics
710.3.3. 8.2
(*SiteSurvey 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Traffic Statistics
parameters.
*ResetTrafficCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.1
(*TrafficStatistics 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Resets the Ethernet
Counters (*EthCounters) and the Wireless Link
Counters (*WlanCounters).
Integer
noReset (0)
reset (1)
*EthCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.2
(*TrafficStatistics 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Ethernet counters.
*TotalRxFramesViaEthernet
710.3.3. 8.2.2.1
(*EthCounters 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Total
number of frames received via the Ethernet port. Counter
*TxWirelessToEthernet
710.3.3. 8.2.2.2
(*EthCounters 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Total
number of frames transmitted to the Ethernet
port.
Counter
*WlanCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.3
(*TrafficStatistics 3)
Applicable to SU and AU. Wireless link counters.
*TotalTxFramesToWireless
710.3.3. 8.2.3.1
(*WlanCounters 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of frames transmitted to the wireless
media. The count includes one count for each
data or RTP frame that was transmitted
successfully (excluding retransmissions), and
also the number of transmitted control and
management frames.
Counter
Appendix B B-23
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*TotalRxFramesFromWireless
710.3.3. 8.2.3.2
(*WlanCounters 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total
number of frames that were received from the
wireless media. The count includes data and
control and management frames, including
beacons received from the AU. The count does
not include frames that were discarded internally,
bad frames and duplicate frames.
Counter
*TotalRetransmittedFragments
710.3.3. 8.2.3.3
(*WlanCounters 3)
For future use Counter
*WlanFramesDropped
710.3.3. 8.2.3.4
(*WlanCounters 4)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of dropped frames. The frames that
were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum
allowed number of retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
Counter
*TransmittedFramesToWirelessData
710.3.3. 8.2.3.5
(*WlanCounters 5)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of
data frames transmitted to the wireless media.
The count includes one count for each data
frame that was transmitted successfully
(excluding retransmissions).
Counter
*TransmittedFramesToWirelessVoice
710.3.3. 8.2.3.6
(*WlanCounters 6)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of
voice frames, including fax and redundant T.38
frames, transmitted to the wireless media. The
count includes one count for each frame that
was transmitted successfully (excluding
retransmissions).
Counter
*TransmittedFramesToWirelessBeacon
710.3.3. 8.2.3.7
(*WlanCounters 7)
Applicable to AU only when the ACSE Option is
enabled. Read-only. The number of beacons
transmitted to the wireless media. The count
includes one count for each beacon that was
transmitted successfully (excluding
retransmission attempts).
Counter
*TotalSubmittedFrames
710.3.3. 8.2.3.8
(*WlanCounters 8)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total
number of data and RTP frames submitted to the
bridge for transmission to the wireless media.
The count does not include control and
management frames, and retransmissions.
Counter
*SubmittedFramesHigh
710.3.3. 8.2.3.9
(*WlanCounters 9)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Counts the
number of frames submitted to the bridge via the
High queue for transmission to the wireless
media. When the ACSE Option is enabled, it
counts data and RTP frames. When the ACSE
Option is disabled, it counts only data frames.
Counter
*SubmittedFramesMid
710.3.3. 8.2.3.10
(*WlanCounters 10)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Counts the
number of frames submitted to the bridge via the
Mid queue for transmission to the wireless
media. When the ACSE Option is enabled, it
counts data and RTP frames. When the ACSE
Option is disabled, it counts only data frames.
Counter
*SubmittedFramesLow
710.3.3. 8.2.3.11
(*WlanCounters 11)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. Counts the
number of frames submitted to the bridge via the
Low queue for transmission to the wireless
media. When the ACSE Option is enabled, it
counts data and RTP frames. When the ACSE
Option is disabled, it counts only data frames.
Counter
*SubmittedFramesVoice
710.3.3. 8.2.3.12
(*WlanCounters 12)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. Counts the
number of voice frames, including fax and T.38
redundant frames, submitted to the bridge for
transmission to the wireless media.
Counter
*FramesDroppedData
710.3.3. 8.2.3.13
(*WlanCounters 13)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of
dropped data frames. The data frames that were
retransmitted to the extent of the maximum
allowed number of retransmissions for data
frames without being acknowledged.
Counter
B-24 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*FramesDroppedVoice
710.3.3. 8.2.3.14
(*WlanCounters 14)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. The number of
dropped voice frames, including fax and T.38
redundant frames. The voice frames that were
retransmitted to the extent of the maximum
allowed number of retransmissions for voice
frames without being acknowledged.
Counter
*TotalRetransmittedFrames
710.3.3. 8.2.3.15
(*WlanCounters 15)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total
number of retransmissions of frames (counts all
unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions).
Counter
*RetransmittedFramesData
710.3.3. 8.2.3.16
(*WlanCounters 16)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. The total number
of retransmissions of data frames (counts all
unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions).
Counter
*RetransmittedFramesVoice
710.3.3. 8.2.3.17
(*WlanCounters 17)
Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE
Option is enabled. Read-only. The total number
of retransmissions of voice frames, including fax
and T.38 redundant frames (counts all
unsuccessful transmissions/retransmissions).
Counter
*TotalTxErrors
710.3.3. 8.2.3.19
(*WlanCounters 19)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred. Counter
*TotalTxErrors
710.3.3. 8.2.3.20Hw
(*WlanCounters 20)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
due to an hardware problem.
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsAbr
710.3.3. 8.2.3.21
(*WlanCounters 21)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because transmission has been aborted before
completion due to internal problems in the DSP.
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsCsl
710.3.3. 8.2.3.22
(*WlanCounters 22)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because transmission was cancelled due to the
modem being busy receiving data.
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsAckTOut
710.3.3. 8.2.3.23
(*WlanCounters 23)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because of an Acknowledge Timeout–a frame
that was not acknowledged within the time
defined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit
parameter.
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsFail
710.3.3. 8.2.3.24
(*WlanCounters 24)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because of an internal timeout in the modem.
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsAckCrc
710.3.3. 8.2.3.25
(*WlanCounters 25)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because of a CRC error in the ACK message.
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsRtsc
710.3.3. 8.2.3.26
(*WlanCounters 26)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because RTS was sent but CTS was not
received (RTS collision).
Counter
*TotalTxErrorsEod
710.3.3. 8.2.3.27
(*WlanCounters 27)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of transmit errors that have occurred
because there was not enough time left to
transmit the message prior to the end of the
Dwell.
Counter
*TotalReceivedDataFrames
710.3.3. 8.2.3.28
(*WlanCounters 28)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total
number of data frames received from the
wireless media, including duplicate frames.
Counter
*ReceivedDataFramesHigh
710.3.3. 8.2.3.29
(*WlanCounters 29)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total
number of data frames received from the
wireless media and routed via the receive High
queue, including duplicate frames.
Counter
*ReceivedDataFramesLow
710.3.3. 8.2.3.30
(*WlanCounters 30)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The total
number of data frames received from the
wireless media and routed via the receive Low
queue, including duplicate frames.
Counter
Appendix B B-25
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*BadFragmentsReceived
710.3.3. 8.2.3.31
(*WlanCounters 31)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of frames received from the wireless
media with errors (CRC errors).
Counter
*DuplicatedFramesDiscarded
710.3.3. 8.2.3.32
(*WlanCounters 32)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of frames discarded due to receiving
multiple copies.
Counter
*InternallyDiscardedMirCir
710.3.3. 8.2.3.33
(*WlanCounters 33)
Applicable to SU and AU. Read-only. The
number of data frames received from the
Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR/
CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the
maximum allowed information rate.
Counter
*VoiceCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.4
(*TrafficStatistics 4)
Applicable to SU with voice support only.
*VoiceTrafficTxFrames
710.3.3. 8.2.4.1
(*VoiceCounters 1)
Applicable to SU with voice support only.
Read-only. Counts the number of voice frames,
including fax and T.38 redundant frames, that
were transmitted to the wireless link.
Counter
*VoiceTrafficRxFrames
710.3.3. 8.2.4.2
(*VoiceCounters 2)
Applicable to SU with voice support only.
Read-only. Counts the number of voice frames,
including fax and T.38 redundant frames, that
were received from the wireless link.
Counter
*VoiceTrafficTxBytes
710.3.3. 8.2.4.3
(*VoiceCounters 3)
Applicable to SU with voice support only.
Read-only. Counts the number of voice bytes,
including fax and T.38 redundant bytes, that
were transmitted to the wireless link.
Counter
*VoiceTrafficRxBytes
710.3.3. 8.2.4.4
(*VoiceCounters 4)
Applicable to SU with voice support only.
Read-only. Counts the number of voice bytes,
including fax and T.38 redundant bytes, that
were received from the wireless link
Counter
*VoiceTrafficResetCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.4.5
(*VoiceCounters 5)
Applicable to SU with voice support only. Reset
the voice counters. noReset (0)
reset (1)
na (255)
*PerRateCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.5
(*TrafficStatistics 5)
Applicable to SU and AU.
*ResetPerRateCounters
710.3.3. 8.2.5.1
(*PerRateCounters 1)
Applicable to AU and SU. Resets the Per Rate
Counters. noReset (0)
reset (1)
na (255)
*PerRateCountersSU
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2
(*PerRateCounters 2)
SU Per Rate Counters.
*TxFrames1M
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.1
(*PerRateCountersSU 1)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted over the
wireless link at 1Mbps.
Counter
*TxFrames2M
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.2
(*PerRateCountersSU 2)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted over the
wireless link at 2Mbps.
Counter
*TxFrames3M
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.3
(*PerRateCountersSU 3)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted over the
wireless link at 3Mbps.
Counter
*ReTxFrames1M
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.4
(*PerRateCountersSU 4)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted
over the wireless link at 1Mbps.
Counter
*ReTxFrames2M
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.5
(*PerRateCountersSU 5)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted
over the wireless link at 2Mbps.
Counter
*ReTxFrames3M
710.3.3. 8.2.5.2.6
(*PerRateCountersSU 6)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted
over the wireless link at 3Mbps.
Counter
B-26 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*ReceivingUnits
710.3.3. 8.3
(*SiteSurvey 3)
*AveragePower
710.3.3. 8.3.1
(*ReceivingUnits 1)
Applicable to SU only. Read-only. Represents
the average Signal Strength of received frames. DisplayString (SIZE(32))
*RssiOrDbm
710.3.3. 8.3.2
(*ReceivingUnits 2)
Applicable to SU and AU. Selects the
measurement units used to display the average
received signal strength.
Integer
rssi (0)
dBm (1)
*PerHopStatistics
710.3.3. 8.4
(*SiteSurvey 4)
Applicable to SU and AU.
*ResetPerHopStatistics
710.3.3. 8.4.1
(*PerHopStatistics 1)
Applicable to SU and AU. Reset the Per Hop
Statistics counters. Integer
noReset (0)
reset (1)
*MacAddressDatabase
710.3.3. 8.5
(*SiteSurvey 5)
Applicable to AU only. Database by MAC
Addresses for all SUs associated with the AU.
The databse include parameters learned by the
AU from the SUs and some counters of wireless
traffic between the AU and the relevant SU, as
measured by the AU.
*AdbResetAllCounters
710.3.3. 8.5.1
(*MacAddressDatabase 1)
Applicable to AU only. To reset all the counters
for all SUs in the MAC Address Database. This
includes the following counters:
*AdbTxFramesTotal
*AdbTxFrames1M
*AdbTxFrames2M
*AdbTxFrames3M
*AdbRTxFramesTotal
*AdbRTxFrames1M
*AdbRTxFrames2M
*AdbRTxFrames3M
*AdbTxDroppedFrames
*AdbRxFramesTotal
noReset (0)
reset (1)
*AdbTable
710.3.3. 8.5.2
(*MacAddressDatabase 2)
Applicable to AU Only. Not accessible. MAC
Address Database table.
*AdbEntry
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1
(*AdbTable 1)
Applicable to AU Only. Not accessible. An entry
in the MAC Address Database table.
*AdbIndex
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.1
(*AdbEntry 1)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The index of
an entry in the MAC Address Database table. Integer
*AdbMacAddress
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.2
(*AdbEntry 2)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The MAC
Address of an SU entry in the MAC Address
Database table.
MAC Address
*AdbMaxRate
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.3
(*AdbEntry 3)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value
configured in the relevant SU for the Maximum
Data Rate parameter.
Integer
1, 2 or 3 (Mbps)
*AdbCurrentTxRate
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.4
(*AdbEntry 4)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The current
transmit rate to the SU. Integer
1, 2 or 3 (Mbps)
*AdbTxFramesTotal
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.5
(*AdbEntry 5)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU
over the wireless link.
Counter
*AdbTxFrames1M
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.6
(*AdbEntry 6)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU
over the wireless link at 1Mbps.
Counter
*AdbTxFrames2M
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.7
(*AdbEntry 7)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU
over the wireless link at 2Mbps.
Counter
Appendix B B-27
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
*AdbTxFrames3M
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.8
(*AdbEntry 8)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were transmitted to the SU
over the wireless link at 3Mbps.
Counter
*AdbRTxTotal
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.9
(*AdbEntry 9)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted to
the SU over the wireless link.
Counter
*AdbRTx1M
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.10
(*AdbEntry 10)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted to
the SU over the wireless link at 1Mbps.
Counter
*AdbRTx2M
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.11
(*AdbEntry 11)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted to
the SU over the wireless link at 2Mbps.
Counter
*AdbRTx3M
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.12
(*AdbEntry 12)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were retransmitted to
the SU over the wireless link at 3Mbps.
Counter
*AdbTxDroppedFrames
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.13
(*AdbEntry 13)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames intended to the SU that
were dropped because they were retransmitted
to the extent of the maximum allowed number of
retransmissions without being acknowledged.
Counter
*AdbRxFramesTotal
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.14
(*AdbEntry 14)
Applicable to AU Only. Read-only. Counts the
total number of frames that were received from
the SU over the wireless link.
Counter
*AdbCirTx
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.16
(*AdbEntry 16)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value
configured in the relevant SU for the CIR: SU to
AU parameter.
Integer
0-2200
(Kbps)
*AdbMirTx
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.17
(*AdbEntry 17)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value
configured in the relevant SU for the MIR: SU to
AU parameter.
Integer
32-2200
(Kbps)
*AdbCirRx
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.18
(*AdbEntry 18)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value
configured in the relevant SU for the CIR: AU to
SU parameter.
Integer
0-2200
(Kbps)
*AdbMirRx
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.194
(*AdbEntry 19)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value
configured in the relevant SU for the MIR: AU to
SU parameter.
Integer
32-2200 (Kbps)
*AdbCirMaxDelay
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.20
(*AdbEntry 20)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The value
configured in the applicable SU for *MaxDelay
parameter.
Integer
*AdbStatus
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.21
(*AdbEntry 21)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The status of
the relevant SU. Integer
associated (1)
authenticated (2)
notAuthenticated 3)
*AdbSwVersion
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.22
(*AdbEntry 22)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The SW
version of the relevant SU. DisplayString
*AdbRssi
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.23
(*AdbEntry 23)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The average
received signal level based on frames received
by the AU from the relevant SU, in RSSI units.
Integer
*AdbDbm
710.3.3. 8.5.2.1.244
(*AdbEntry 24)
Applicable to AU Only. Read only. The average
received signal level based on frames received
by the AU from the relevant SU, in dBm units.
DisplayString
B-28 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Special Operations Parameters
Note: Additional Special Operations parameters are reserved for factory use only.
MIB Parameter
(Location in
Parenthesis)
Description Values/Range
*SpecialOp
710.3.3. 9
(brzAccessMib 9)
*RadioBand
710.3.3. 9.1
(*SpecialOp 3)
Applicable to AU and SU. Read-only.
Identifies the product family/band: DisplayString (SIZE(15))
(2.4 (BreezeACCESS II), MMDS, 2.6a, 2.6b, 3.3a,
3.5a, 3.5a1, 3.5b, 3.5ab, 3.6b, 3.8, 5.7(SD),
5.7 (D,D))
Appendix B B-29
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Unit Control Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*UnitControl
710.3.3. 10
(brzAccessMib 10)
*ResetUnit
710.3.3. 10.1
(*UnitControl 1)
Applicable to all products. Resets
the unit and applies new parameter
values.
Integer
cancel (0)
resetSystemNow (1)
*SetDefaults
710.3.3. 10.2
(*UnitControl 2)
Applicable to all products. Sets unit
configuration to Defaults values
after the next reset.
completeFactory: All parameters
revert to Factory Defaults values
partialFactory: All parameters
revert to Factory Defaults values,
except the parameters required for
maintaining wireless connectivity.
completeOperator: All parameters
revert to Operator Defaults values
partialOperator: All parameters
revert to Operator Defaults values,
except the parameters required for
maintaining wireless connectivity.
Integer
cancel (0)
completeFactory (1)
partialFactory (2)
completeOperator (1)
partialOperator (2)
*UnitName
710.3.3. 10.3
(*UnitControl 3)
Applicable to all products. The unit
name. DisplayString (SIZE(32))
A string of up to 32 printable ASCII
characters.
*FlashMemoryControl
710.3.3. 10.4
(*UnitControl 4)
Applicable to all products. Reset
And Boot From Shadow Version:
Activates the backup version.
Use Current Version After Reset :
The currently active version is
activated after reset.
Integer
Cancel (0)
resetAndBootFrom
ShadowVersion (1)
useCurrentVersion
AfterReset (2)
*ConsoleSpeed
710.3.3. 10.5
(*UnitControl 5)
Applicable to all products. The
communication speed of the
Monitor port.
Integer
s9600bps (1)
s19200bps (2)
s38400bps (3)
s57600bps (4)
s115200bps (5)
*MonitorLogoutTimer
710.3.3. 10.6
(*UnitControl 6)
Applicable to all products. Time-out
of management programs
(Monitor, Telnet).
Automatic exit if the program is
inactive for the defined time.
Integer
1-999 (minutes)
*UnitPasswords
710.3.3. 10.7
(*UnitControl 7)
*ReadOnlyPassword
710.3.3. 10.7.1
(*UnitPasswords 1)
Applicable to all products. The
User (read only) password. DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
Up to 8 printable ASCII characters.
*InstallerPassword
710.3.3. 10.7.2
(*UnitPasswords 2)
Applicable to all products. The
Installer password. DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
Up to 8 printable ASCII characters.
*AdminPassword
710.3.3. 10.7.3
(*UnitPasswords 3)
Applicable to all products. The
Administrator password. This is
also the SNMP Write Community
String.
DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
Up to 8 printable ASCII characters.
*EventLog
710.3.3. 10.10
(*UnitControl 10)
Applicable to all products. Event
Log parameters
B-30 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
IP Parameters
*EventLogPolicy
710.3.3. 10.10.1
(*EventLog 1)
Applicable to all products.
Determines which events will be
stored in the Event Log. Event
from the configured level and
higher are stored and can be
displayed using the Monitor or by
getting a the log file using TFTP.
Integer
logAll (1)
message (2)
warning (3)
error (4)
fatal (5)
logNone (6)
*NumberOfEventsInLogFile
710.3.3. 10.10.2
(*EventLog 2)
Applicable to all products. Read-
only. The number of events in the
Event Log file.
Integer
*EraseEventLog
710.3.3. 10.10.3
(*EventLog 3)
Applicable to all products. Deletes
all entries from the Event Log file. Integer
cancel (0)
erase (1)
*SaveCurrentConfigurationAs
OperatorDefaults
710.3.3. 10.12
(*UnitControl 12)
Applicable to all products. Saves
the current configuration as
Operator Defaults.
Integer
cancel (0)
saveAsDefaults (1)
*ExitMonitorOrTelnet
710.3.3. 10.13
(*UnitControl 13)
Applicable to all products. Exit the
monitor program. Integer
cancelOperation (0)
exit (1)
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*IpParams
710.3.3. 11
(brzAccessMib 11)
*UnitIpAddress
710.3.3. 11.1
(*IpParams 1)
Applicable to all products. IP address of the unit. IP address
*SubNetMask
710.3.3. 11.2
(*IpParams 2)
Applicable to all products. Subnet mask of the unit. IP address
*DefaultGWAddress
710.3.3. 11.3
(*IpParams 3)
Applicable to all products. Default gateway IP address of
the unit. IP address
*UseDhcp
710.3.3. 11.4
(*IpParams 4)
Applicable to all products. DHCP client mode of operation.
disabled: Use regular (manual) methods to configure IP
parameters.
dHCP Only: Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters.
automatic: Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters. If
a DHCP server is not available, use configured values for
*UnitIpAddress, *SubNetMask and *DefaultGWAddress.
Integer
disable (0)
dHCPOnly (1)
automatic (2)
*RunIPaddr
710.3.3. 11.5
(*IpParams 5)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: The run-time IP
address. If DHCP is used the Run Time IP Address is the
address given to the unit by the server. Otherwise it is the
manualy configured address.
IP address
*RunSubNetMask
710.3.3. 11.6
(*IpParams 6)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: The run-time Subnet
Mask. If DHCP is used the Run Time Subnet Mask is the
mask given to the unit by the server. Otherwise it is the
manualy configured mask.
IP address
*RunDefaultIPGateway
710.3.3. 11.7
(*IpParams 7)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: The run-time
Gateway IP address. If DHCP is used the Run Time
Gateway IP Address is the address given to the unit by the
server. Otherwise it is the manualy configured address.
IP address
*AccessToDHCP
710.3.3. 11.8
(*IpParams 8)
Applicable to all products. The port to be used for
communicating with a DHCP server. (In GU only the
fromEthernetOnly option is available).
Integer
fromWlanOnly(0)
fromEthernetOnly(1)
fromBoth(2)
Appendix B B-31
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
System Information Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*SysInfo
710.3.3. 13 (brzAccessMib 13)
*UnitHwVersion
710.3.3. 13.1
(*SysInfo 1)
Applicable to all products. Read-only:
Hardware platform version. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*VoiceHwVersion
710.3.3. 13.2
(*SysInfo 2)
Applicable only to SU with voice. Read-only:
Voice hardware platform version. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*SoftwareVersion
710.3.3. 13.3
(*SysInfo 3)
Applicable to all products. Read-only:
Running software version. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*ShadowVersion
710.3.3. 13.4
(*SysInfo 4)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: Shadow
software version. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*SupportedMibVersion
710.3.3. 13.5
(*SysInfo 5)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: The
supported private MIB versions. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*UnitMacAddress
710.3.3. 13.6
(*SysInfo 6)
Applicable to all products. Read-only, Unit
hardware MAC address. MAC address
*UnitType
710.3.3. 13.7
(*SysInfo 7)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: Unit
type. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*AssociatedAU
710.3.3. 13.8
(*SysInfo 8)
Applicable to SU only.
Read-only: Associated AU MAC address. MAC address
*NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset
710.3.3. 13.9
(*SysInfo 9)
Applicable to AU and SU.
Read-only: The number of associations since
last reset, including duplicate associations
(re-associations).
Integer
*FlashType
710.3.3. 13.10
(*SysInfo 10)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: Flash
memory type.
Type S - Strata Flash.
Type F – all other Flash types.
DisplayString
(SIZE(0..31))
*FlashSize
710.3.3. 13.11
(*SysInfo 11)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: Flash
size in Mb. Integer
*SwVersionAfterReset
710.3.3. 13.12
(*SysInfo 12)
Applicable to all products. Read-only: The
software version to be used after next reset. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..32))
*MaxPowerOutput
710.3.3. 13.13
(*SysInfo 13)
Applicable to SU and AU.
Read-only: The maximum output power to the
antenna port.
Integer
na (255)
*FrequencyDuplex
710.3.3. 13.14
(*SysInfo 14)
Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS
XL family only.
Read-only: The frequency separation
between uplink and downlink.
Integer
*UnitStatus
710.3.3. 13.15
(*SysInfo 15)
Applicable to GU only. The status of the GPS
antenna. DisplayString
(SIZE(0..100))
*CurrentNumOfAssociations
710.3.3. 13.16
(*SysInfo 16)
Applicable to AU only. Read-only. The number
of subscriber units currently associated with
the AU.
Integer
B-32 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Alarms Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values/Range
*Alarms
710.3.3. 20
(brzAccessMib 20)
Alarms parameters
*GpsAlarms
710.3.3. 20.1
(*Alarms 1)
Applicable to GU only. GPS Alarms parameters.
*AlarmInTable
710.3.3. 20.1.1
(*GpsAlarms 1)
Applicable to GU only. Names and status of Alarms-In. Not
accessible.
*AlarmInTableEntry
710.3.3. 20.1.1.1
(*AlarmInTable 1)
Applicable to GU only. An Alarms In table entry. Not
accessible.
*AlarmInIdx
710.3.3. 20.1.1.1.1
(*AlarmInTableEntry 1)
Applicable to GU only. Read-only. Alarms In table index Integer
1-10
*AlarmInName
710.3.3. 20.1.1.1.2
(*AlarmInTableEntry 2)
Applicable to GU only. Alarm In name. Alarms 1 to 4 can
receive a name. The other are read-only.
DisplayString
(SIZE(0..31))
*AlarmInStatus
710.3.3. 20.1.1.1.3
(*AlarmInTableEntry 3)
Applicable to GU only. Read-only. The status (off or on) of
Alarm In entry. Integer
off (0)
on (1)
na (255)
*AlarmOutTable
710.3.3. 20.1.2
(*GpsAlarms 2)
Applicable to GU only. Names, definition, control and status of
Alarms-Out. Not accessible.
*AlarmOutTableEntry
710.3.3. 20.1.2.1
(*AlarmOutTable 1)
Applicable to GU only. An Alarms Out table entry. Not
accessible.
*AlarmOutIdx
710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.1
(*AlarmOutTableEntry 1)
Applicable to GU only. Read-only. Alarms Out table index Integer
1-3
*AlarmOutName
710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.2
(*AlarmOutTableEntry 2)
Applicable to GU only. Alarm Out name. The other are read-
only.
DisplayString
(SIZE(0..31))
*AlarmOutDefinition
710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.3
(*AlarmOutTableEntry 3)
Applicable to GU only. Enter an Alarm-In number to activate
the Alarm-Out when this Alarm-In is ON. Enter A to activate
the Alarm-Out if ANY of the Alarms-In are ON. Enter N
for NONE (never activate the Alarm Out).
DisplayString
(SIZE(0..2))
1-10, A, N
*AlarmOutControl
710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.4
(*AlarmOutTableEntry 4)
Applicable to GU only. Alarm out control:
off (0) – turn alarm off.
on (1) – turn alarm on.
auto (2)-activate according to status of relevant alarm-in in
accordance with Alarm Out Definition.
Integer
off (0)
on (1)
auto (2)
na (255)
*AlarmOutStatus
710.3.3. 20.1.2.1.5
(*AlarmOutTableEntry 5)
Applicable to GU only. Read-only. The status (off or on) of
Alarm Out entry. Integer
off (0)
on (1)
na (255)
Appendix B B-33
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
brzPhoneMIB (applicable to SU
with voice only)
breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER =1.3.6.1.4.1.710
{(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1) private(4) enterprises(1) breezecom(710)}
breezecomPrvRev OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3
{breezecom 3}
brzPhoneMib OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.710.3.4
{breezecomPrvRev 4 }
Note: * is used instead of the phon prefix
Dialing Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values
*DialingParams
710.3.4.1
(brzPhonMib 1)
*PulseDialing
710.3.4.1.1
(*DialingParams 1)
Enables/disables automatic pulse
dialing detection. Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*GateKeeperOption
710.3.4.1.2
(*DialingParams 2)
Enables/disables communicating
with the Gatekeeper for call
management purposes.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*GkGwIpAddress
710.3.4.1.3
(*DialingParams 3)
IP Address of the Gateway/
Gatekeeper
The parameters must be specified if
the [*GateKeeperOption] is
enabled.
IP address
*MyTelephoneNumber
710.3.4.1.4
(*DialingParams 4)
The telephone number as specified
in the Gateway, if
[*GateKeeperOption] is disabled. If
the [*GateKeeperOption] is enabled
the number is transmitted to the
Gatekeeper.
DisplayString (SIZE (0..10))
Up to 10 characters.
0 means no number
*H323TerminalID
710.3.4.1.5
(*DialingParams 5)
The H323 Terminal ID (name) to be
used for calling the unit if the
feature is enabled.
Applicable only if the
[*GateKeeperOption] is enabled.
DisplayString (SIZE (0..25))
Up to 24 characters.
X=NoID
*IpDialingOption
710.3.4.1.8
(*DialingParams 8)
Enables/disables dialing using IP
addresses. Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*IpDialingIndicator
710.3.4.1.9
(*DialingParams 9)
Specifies the prefix used to identify
an IP dialing string. DisplayString (SIZE (0..15))
Up to three telephone pad digits (0-9, A-
D, *, #).
X means no IP Dialing Indicator
*AutomaticPrefix
710.3.4.1.10
(*DialingParams 10)
Specifies a default prefix (number
of Gateway trunk) to be
automatically inserted before the
dialed number.
DisplayString (SIZE (0..15))
Up to eight telephone pad digits (0-9, A-
D, *, #).
X means no Automatic Prefix.
B-34 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*FastStart
710.3.4.1.13
(*DialingParams 13)
Enables/disables the fast connect
protocol. Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*InformTransferCap
710.3.4.1.14
(*DialingParams 14)
Defines the value of the information
transfer capability in the SETUP
message.
Integer
speech (0)
unrestricted (1)
restricted (2)
audio (3)
unrestrictedTones (4)
video (5)
na (255)
*DTMFRelay
710.3.4.1.15
(*DialingParams 15)
Disable/enable DTMF Relay.
0 ñ Disable. DTMF is transferred in-
band.
1 ñ Enable. In-band DTMF is
filtered. DTMF is relayed via H.245
session.In case of 'Fast Start' H.245
session will be forced upon DTMF
detection.
2 - Enable Proprietary. In-band
DTMF is filtered. In case of 'Fast
Start' DTMF is relayed via Q.931
session. Otherwise DTMF is
relayed via H.245 session.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
enableProprietary (2)
na (255)
*DialingPrfxOption
710.3.4.1.16 (
(*DialingParams 16)
Defines the Dialing Prefix Option for
handling prefixes according to the
dialing plan supported by the unit.
disable (0): Insert Automatic Prefix
(if defined). Otherwise forward as
dialed.
enable (1): Insert Automatic Prefix
(if defined) only if first digit differs
from *InterRegionalPrfx. Otherwise
forward as dialed.
enableBlockInter-
RegionalPrfx (2):
Insert Automatic Prefix (if defined)
only if first digit differs from
*InterRegionalPrfx. Remove the
first digit if it equals
*InterRegionalPrfx and the second
digit differs from *InterNationalPrfx.
Otherwise forward as dialed.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
enableBlockInter-
RegionalPrfx (2)
na (255)
*InterRegionalPrfx
710.3.4.1.17
(*DialingParams 17)
To define the Inter Regional prefix
to be handled according to the
dialing plan supported by the unit.
DisplayString (SIZE (0..1))
One phone keypad digit (0-9, A-D, *, #)
or X. X means no Inter Regional Prefix is
defined
*InterNationalPrfx
710.3.4.1.18
(*DialingParams 18)
To define the International prefix to
be handled according to the dialing
plan supported by the unit.
DisplayString (SIZE (0..1))
One phone keypad digit (0-9, A-D, *, #)
or X. X means no International Prefix is
defined.
*RegistrationTTL
710.3.4.1.19
(*DialingParams 19)
To define the registration Time To
Live. (timeToLive request in the
RRQ message to the Gatekeeper).
Integer
0 ñ 65535
*EndpointType
710.3.4.1.20
(*DialingParams 20)
To define the EndpointType
components in H.323 messages for
interoperability with other
equipment using H.323.
Integer
terminal (1)
gateway (2)
na (255)
*FaxRelay
710.3.4.1.21
(*DialingParams 21)
Disable/enable T.38 fax relay Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*FaxRelayRedundancy
710.3.4.1.22
(*DialingParams 22)
Defines redundancy used for
transmitting IFP messages Integer
0-5
na (255)
*BatteryPolarity
710.3.4.1.23
(*DialingParams 23)
To define the battery polarity for
supporting an external device, e.g.
for coins or tokens charging
purpose. This feature is only
available in units with voice card
from revision D and up.
Integer
forward (1)
reverse (2)
forwardToReverse (3)
reverseToForward (4)
na (255)
Appendix B B-35
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Voice Parameters
*AlternateGkOption
710.3.4.1.24
(*DialingParams 24)
Setting the Alternate Gatekeeper
feature.
EnableManualDiscovery: the
Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is
specified by the Alternate
Gatekeeper IP Address parameter.
EnableAutomaticDiscovery: the
Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is
received from the Primary GK.
Integer
disable (0)
enableManualDiscovery (1)
enableAutomaticDiscovery (2)
na (255)
*AlternateGkIPAddress
710.3.4.1.25
(*DialingParams 25)
To set the Alternate Gatekeeper IP
address when Alternate
Gatekeeper Option is set to
enableManualDiscovery.
IP Address
*CallerID
710.3.4.1.26
(*DialingParams 26)
To defines whether the unit will
support generation of Caller ID
(CID) signaling and if CID is
supported, which standard will be
used.
disable (0): No CID signalling
etsiDtAs (1): CID signalling in
accordance with ETSI 300-659-1,
using Dual Tone Alerting Signal
etsiRpAs (2): CID signalling in
accordance with ETSI 300-659-1,
using Ringing Pulse Alerting Signal
etsiRinging (4): CID signalling in
accordance with ETSI 300-659-1,
transmitting data during the first
long silence between two ring
patterns.
bellcoreMdmf (5): CID signaling in
accordance with Bellcore 202,
using Multiple Data Message
Format (MDMF) which includes a
name field in addition to the date,
time and number.
bellcoreSdmf (6): CID signaling in
accordance with Bellcore 202,
using Single Data Message Format
(SDMF) which includes the date,
time and number.
Integer
disable (0)
etsi3006591DtAs (1)
etsi3006591RpAs (2)
etsi3006591Ringing (4)
bellcore202Mdmf (5)
bellcore202Sdmf (6)
na (255)
*StopDialingIndicator
710.3.4.1.27
(*DialingParams 28)
To enable/disable the use of the #
sign to indicate end of dialing
disable: The # sign is interpreted as
a part of the dialed sequence. End
of dialing is determined by the
*StopDialingTimeOut parameter.
enable: The # sign is interpreted as
indicating end of dialing sequence.
Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
*StopDialingTimeOut
710.3.4.1.28
(*DialingParams 28)
To define the inactivity time
following the last dialed digit that
will be identified by the unit as an
indication to end of dialing.
Integer
3 – 60 (seconds)
na (255)
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values
*VoiceParams
710.3.4.2
(brzPhonMib 2)
*VoiceVolume
710.3.4.2.1
(*VoiceParams 1)
Gain of signal to earphone. Integer
0-20 (-dB)
na (255)
*EchoCancellation
710.3.4.2.3
(*VoiceParams 3)
Enables or disables the echo
cancellation feature. Integer
disable (0)
enable (1)
na (255)
B-36 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*VoiceCodec
710.3.4.2.4
(*VoiceParams 4)
The relative priority of voice codecs. DisplayString (SIZE (0..120))
A priorities vector of up to 7 different
numbers in the range 1-7, where
1=G.723.1
2=G.729
3=G.711 uLaw 64k
4=G.711 Alaw 64k
5=G.729AnnexA
6= G.729wAnnexB
7= G.729AnnexAwAnnexB
*VoiceActivityDetection
710.3.4.2.5
(*VoiceParams 5)
Enables or disables the voice activity
detection (VAD) feature when using
G7231 codec.
off (0)
g7231 (1)
na (255)
*CompressionEfficiency
710.3.4.2.6
(*VoiceParams 6)
Compression Efficiency parameters
*G723FramesPerPacket
710.3.4.2.6.1
(*CompressionEfficiency 1)
Number of G723.1 voice frames in an
RTP packet. Integer
1-8
na (255)
*G729FramesPerPacket
710.3.4.2.6.2
(*CompressionEfficiency 2)
Number of G729A voice frames in an
RTP packet. Integer
1-8
na (255)
*G711uFramesPer
Packet
710.3.4.2.6.3
(*CompressionEfficiency 3)
Number of G11 u-Law voice frames in an
RTP packet. Integer
1-16
na (255)
*G711aFramesPerPacket
710.3.4.2.6.4
(*CompressionEfficiency 4)
Number of G11 A-Law voice frames in
an RTP packet. Integer
1-16
na (255)
Appendix B B-37
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Telephony Signals
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values
*TelephonySignals
710.3.4.3
(brzPhonMib 3)
*TelephonyCountryStandard
710.3.4.3.1
(*TelephonySignals 1)
The country standard for call progress
tones, ringer and timeouts. INTEGER
proprietary (1)
germany (2)
sweden (3)
france (4)
unitedKingdom (5)
belgium (6)
usa (7)
chile (8)
na (255)
*TonesTable
710.3.4.3.2
(*TelephonySignals 2)
A table of parameters of the tones. If the
*TelephonyCountryStandard is set to
proprietary, the tones parameters may be
configured (read/write). For all other
country standards, the values are read-
only. Not accessible.
*TonesEntry
710.3.4.3.2.1
(**TonesTable 1)
A table entry in the Tones Table. Not
accessible.
*TonesIdx
710.3.4.3.2.1.1
(*TonesEntry 1)
An index to the Tones Table indicating the
tone type. Read-only. Integer
1-8
*ToneName
710.3.4.3.2.1.2
(*TonesEntry 2)
The name of the tone. Integer
Dial Tone(1)
Ring Back Tone (2)
Busy Tone (3)
Congestion Tone (4)
Call In Process Tone (5)
Ring Frequency (6)
Error Tone (7)
High Level Error Tone (8)
*Freq1
710.3.4.3.2.1.3
(*TonesEntry 3)
One of the two frequencies that can be
used for generating the tone. Serves as
the Ringer Frequency for Tone 6 (Ring
Frequency).
If set to 0 – this frequency is not used.
Integer
0-3000 (Hz)
If Ring Frequency (Tone 6), valid
values are 17, 20, 25, 50 (Hz).
*Freq2
710.3.4.3.2.1.4
(*TonesEntry 4)
The second frequency that can be used
for generating the tone.
Not Applicable for Ring Frequency (Tone
6)
If set to 0 – this frequency is not used.
Integer
0-3000 (Hz).
na (255)
*Level1
710.3.4.3.2.1.5
(*TonesEntry 5)
The level in dBm of the first frequency
(*Freq1).
Not Applicable for Ring Frequency (Tone
6)
Display String
-31 to 3 (dBm). ñ32 is for mute.
*Level2
710.3.4.3.2.1.6
(*TonesEntry 6)
The level in dBm of the second frequency
(*Freq2).
Not Applicable for Ring Frequency (Tone
6)
Display String
-31 to 3 (dBm). ñ32 is for mute.
*CadenceOn
710.3.4.3.2.1.7
(*TonesEntry 7)
the ringing time (on) in the tones/silence
sequence of the tone. Integer
100–10,000 (milliseconds)
*CadenceOff
710.3.4.3.2.1.8
(*TonesEntry 8)
the silence time (off) in the tones/silence
sequence of the tone. Integer
100–10,000 (milliseconds)
*Duration
710.3.4.3.2.1.9
(*TonesEntry 9)
the maximum duration of transmitting the
tone to the earphone. Tone generation will
cease upon hang-up (upon off-hook for
Tone 6 - Ring Frequency).
Integer
0-10,000 (seconds)
(0 means that the tone is not
used).
B-38 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
*TimeOuts
710.3.4.3.3
(*TelephonySignals 3)
Time Out parameters. If the
*TelephonyCountryStandard is set to
proprietary, the Time Out parameters may
be configured (read/write). For all other
country standards, the values are read-
only.
*MinimumFlashDetectTimeOut
710.3.4.3.3.1
(*TimeOuts 1)
The minimum on-hook time for identifying
it as a Hook Flash. Integer
0-2,000 (milliseconds)
*MaximumFlashDetectTimeOut
710.3.4.3.3.2
(*TimeOuts 2)
The maximum on-hook time for identifying
it as a Hook Flash. Integer
0-2,000 (milliseconds)
*DisconnectTimeOut
710.3.4.3.3.3
(*TimeOuts 3)
The minimum time for decision on an on-
hook (disconnect) condition. Integer
0-2,000 (milliseconds)
*InterDigitTimeOut
710.3.4.3.3.4
(*TimeOuts 4)
Applicable only for pulse dialing. The
minimum time between two consecutive
pulses to be considered as separating
between two digits.
Integer
0-2,000 (milliseconds)
*CalledPartyReleaseTimeOut
710.3.4.3.3.5
(*TimeOuts 5)
The minimum time for an on-hook signal
on the called party side to be considered
as call disconnect.
Integer
0-10,000 (milliseconds)
Appendix B B-39
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Supported Traps
Note: * is used instead of the brzacc prefix
Trap Associated Parameters
MIB Parameter
(Location in Parenthesis) Description Values
*Traps
710.3.3.14
(brzAccessMib 14)
*TrapSUMacAddr
710.3.3.14.1
(*Traps 1)
Applicable to AU only. SU MAC address. MAC address
*TrapRssiQuality
710.3.3.14.2
(*Traps 2)
Applicable to SU only. RSSI level of the received signal. Integer
*TrapLastRssiQuality
710.3.3.14.3
(*Traps 3)
Applicable to SU only. RSSI level of the received signal
from the last AU with which the SU was associated. Integer
*TrapText
710.3.3.14.4
(*Traps 4)
Textual string for future use. DisplayString
*TrapToggle
710.3.3.14.5
(*Traps 5)
An On/Off toggle status, indicating a change in status
from off to on or vice versa. Integer
on (1)
off (2)
*LastAUMacAddress
710.3.3.14.6
(*Traps 6)
Applicable to SU only.
The MAC address of the last AU with which the SU was
associated.
MAC address
*TrapLog
710.3.3.14.7
(*Traps 7)
Login or logout to the monitor program via the Monitor
port or Telnet. Integer
monitorLogin (1)
monitorLogout(2)
telnetLogin (3)
telnetLogout (4)
*TrapParameterChanged
710.3.3.14.8
(*Traps 8)
A modification to one of the parameters related to CIR/
MIR, IP Filtering, Accounting (Billing) or VLAN . Integer
cirOrMir (1)
ipFilter (2)
billing (3)
vlan (4)
*TrapAccessRights
710.3.3.14.9
(*Traps 9)
The access rights used for login. Integer
notLoggedIn (0)
readOnly (1)
installer (2)
administrator (3)
factory (4)
*TrapTelnetUserIpAddress
710.3.3.14.11
(*Traps 11)
The IP address of a Telnet user. IP address
*TrapAlarmNumber
710.3.3.14.12
(*Traps 12)
Applicable to GU only. The number of the alarm whose
status has been changed. Integer
1-10
*TrapAlarmName
710.3.3.14.13
(*Traps 13)
Applicable to GU only. The Name of the alarm whose
status has been changed. DisplayString
*TrapRTx
710.3.3.14.14
(*Traps 14)
Applicable to AU only. Retransmissions as a percentage
of total transmissions. Integer
0-100
B-40 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Traps
Trap (Number) Description Variables
*SUassociatedAUTRAP(2) An AU trap indicating a new
association with an SU. *TrapSUMacAddr
*AUdisassociatedTRAP(3) An AU trap indicating that an SU has
been disassociated from the AU. The
AU decides that an SU has been
disassociated from it and remove it
from the ADB after receiving from
another AU a SNAP frame with the SU
MAC address. The SNAP frame
indicating a network topology change
where the SU has associated with
another AU will be received if both
AUs are connected to the same
Ethernet backbone.
*TrapSUMacAddr
*AUagingTRAP (4) An AU trap indicating that an SU was
aged out and removed from the ADB
following its failure to acknowledge a
certain number of consecutive frames
transmitted to it.
*TrapSUMacAddr
*SUassociatedTRAP (6) An SU trap indicating association with
an AU. In addition to the MAC address
information of the AU, the trap also
includes information on the average
RSSI of frames received from the AU.
*AssociatedAU
*LastAUMacAddress
*TrapRssiQuality
*TrapLastRssiQuality
*SUWirelessQualityTRAP(7) An SU trap, indicating that the quality
of the wireless link has changed and
dropped below (On) or has improved
above (Off), defined by the
*WirelessTrapThreshold.
The threshold is in RSSI units.
*TrapToggle
*UnitMacAddress
*TrapRssiQuality
*AUWirelessQualityTRAP(20) An AU trap, indicating that the quality
of the wireless link with a specific SU
has changed and dropped below (On)
or has improved above (Off) a
threshold defined by
*WirelessTrapThreshold. The
threshold is a percents
(retransmissions as percentage of
total transmissions).
*TrapToggle
*TrapRTx
*PowerUpFromReset (101) A trap indicating power up after Reset. *UnitMacAddr
*MonitorStatusTRAP (102) A trap indicating that a log-in or
log-out has been performed via the
Monitor port or Telnet. Includes the
log-in access right and the IP address
of the PC performing Telnet (if access
is via Monitor the address is 0)
*TrapLog
*TrapAccessRights
*TrapTelnetUserIpAddress
*ParameterChangedTRAP(103) An AU or SU trap indicating a change
in a CIR/MIR, IP Filter, Accounting or
VLAN parameter.
*TrapParameterChanged
*GpsAlarmInTRAP (104) A GU trap indicating a change in
alarm-in status *brzaccTrapToggle
*AlarmName
*AlarmNumber
*GpsAlarmOutTRAP (105) A GU trap indicating a change in
alarm-out status *brzaccTrapToggle
*AlarmName
*AlarmNumber
*GpsUTCstatusTRAP (106) A GU trap indicating a change in UTC
status. On status is when the GU
module receives UTC information
from the GPS antenna. This
information is useful only if the GU
receives also PPS signals from the
GPS antenna, indicated by an on
status of Alarm In 5 (GPS Antenna
Alarm).
*TrapToggle
Appendix B B-41
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
B-42 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Appendix C:
RSSI to dBm
Conversion Table
RSSI dBM RSSI dBM
71 -100 114 -64
72 -99 115 -63
74 -98 116 -62
75 -97 118 -61
77 -96 119 -60
78 -95 120 -59
81 -94 121 -58
82 -93 122 -57
83 -92 123 -56
84 -91 125 -55
85 -90 126 -54
86 -89 127 -53
88 -88 128 -52
89 -87 129 -51
90 -86 130 -50
91 -85 131 -49
92 -84 133 -48
93 -83 134 -47
94 -82 135 -46
96 -81 136 -45
97 -80 137 -44
98 -79 138 -43
99 -78 139 -42
100 -77 141 -41
101 -76 142 -40
102 -75 143 -39
103 -74 144 -38
104 -73 145 -37
105 -72 146 -36
106 -71 148 -35
107 -70 149 -34
108 -69 150 -33
110 -68 151 -32
111 -67 152 -31
112 -66 153 -30
113 -65
C-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Appendix D:
Parameters List
Unit Control Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Change Unit Name All Up to 32 printable ASCII
characters
Empty String Yes
Change Read-only
Password
All Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters
public Yes – For
access from
Monitor or
Telnet only
Change Installer
Password
All Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters
user Yes – For
access from
Monitor or
Telnet only
Change
Administrator
Password
All Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters
private Yes – For
access from
Monitor or
Telnet only
Console Speed All 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
9600 No
Log Out Timer All 1-999 minutes 5 Yes
Event Log Policy All Log All (TRC) Level,
Message (MSG) Level,
Warning (WRN) Level,
Error (ERR) Level,
Fatal (FTL) Level,
Log None
Fatal (FTL) Level Yes
D-2 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Site Survey Parameters
IP Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
RSSI Display
Option
AU, SU RSSI, dBm RSSI Yes
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
IP Address All IP address 10.0.0.1 No
Subnet Mask All IP address 255.0.0.0 No
Default Gateway
Address
All IP address 0.0.0.0 No
DHCP Option All Disable,
DHCP Only,
Automatic
Disable No
Access to DHCP AU, SU From Wlan Only,
From Ethernet Only,
From Both Ethernet & Wlan
AU: From
Ethernet Only
SU: From Wlan
Only
No
Appendix D D-3
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Air Interface Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
ESSID AU, SU Up to 31 printable ASCII
characters
ESSID1 No
Operator ESSID
Option
AU Disable, Enable Enable No
Operator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII
characters
ESSID1 No
Hopping Sequence AU Depends on hopping standard 1 No
Hopping Set AU 1-3 1 No
Hopping Sync AU Idle, Master, Slave Idle No
Best AU Support SU Disable, Enable Disable No
Number of Scanning
Attempts
SU 1 – 255 20 Yes
Preferred AU MAC
Address
SU MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-
00 (no preferred
AU)
Yes
Transmit Power
Control
AU-A/E,
SU-A/E (IF
based units)
0 – 15 15 Yes
Power Level SU-R, SU-I/
AU-I
Low, High High No
Transmit Antenna SU-R
SU-I/AU-I
Use Two Antennas,
Use Antenna No. 1,
Use Antenna No. 2
Use Antenna
Number 1
No
Receive Attenuation
Control
SU-A/E (IF
based units)
0, 10dB, 25dB 0 No
Maximum Data
Rate
AU, SU 1, 2 and 3Mbps 3Mbps No
Acknowledge Delay
Limit
AU, SU Low, Medium, High Low No
Maximum Number
of Associations
AU 1 – 512 512 Yes
Call Aging Time AU 1 (no aging), 2-50,000 (seconds) 1800 seconds No
Maximum Voice
Sessions
AU 0 – 50 12 Yes
ACSE Option AU and GU Disable, Enable Disable No
ACSE Maximum
Voice Sessions
AU 0 – 21 21 Yes
D-4 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
ACSE Number Of
Retransmissions For
Data
AU, SU 0 – 100 6 No
ACSE Number Of
Retransmissions For
Voice
AU, SU with
voice
0 – 100 30 No
Appendix D D-5
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Network Management
Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Access To Network
Management
AU, SU From Wlan Only,
From Ethernet Only,
From Both Ethernet & Wlan
From Both
Ethernet & Wlan
No
Network
Management
Filtering
All Disable,
Activate Management IP Filter
On Ethernet Port,
Activate Management IP Filter
On Wlan Port (not available in
GU),
Activate Management IP Filter
On Both Ethernet & Wlan Ports
(not available in GU),
Disable No
Set Network
Management IP
Address
All IP address 0.0.0.0 (all 3
entries)
Yes
Send SNMP Traps All Disable Traps Sending,
Enable Traps Sending
Disable Traps
Sending
No
SNPM Traps IP
Destination
All IP address 0.0.0.0 (all 3
entries)
No
SNMP Traps
Community
All Up to 14 printable ASCII
characters
public (all 3
entries)
No
D-6 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Bridge Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
VLAN ID-Data SU 1 – 4094 1 No
VLAN ID –
Management
AU, GU, SU
without
voice
1 – 4094, 65535 65535 (no VLAN) No
VLAN ID – Voice
& Management
SU with
voice
1 – 4094, 65535 65535 (no VLAN) No
VLAN Link Type AU, SU Hybrid Link,
Trunk Link,
Access Link (only in SU)
Hybrid Link No
Voice Priority Tag
Option
SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Disable No
VLAN Forwarding
Support
AU, SU Disable, Enable Disable No
VLAN Forwarding
ID
AU, SU 1 – 4094 (up to 20 entries) Empty list No
VLAN Relaying
Support
AU Disable, Enable Disable No
VLAN Relaying ID AU 1 – 4094 (up to 20 entries) Empty list No
VLAN Priority –
Data
AU, SU 0 – 7 0 No
VLAN Priority –
Voice
SU with
voice
0 – 7 6 Yes
VLAN Priority –
Management
AU, SU, GU 0 – 7 SU with voice: 4
All other units: 0
No
VLAN Priority
Threshold
AU, SU 0 – 7 4 Yes
Voice Packets ToS SU with
voice
0 – 255 0 Yes
ToS Precedence
Threshold
AU, SU 0 – 7 3 Yes
Filter Option SU Disable,
From Ethernet Only,
From Wlan Only,
Both From Ethernet & Wlan
Disable Yes
DHCP Broadcast
Override Filter
SU Disable, Enable Disable Yes
PPPoE Broadcast
Override Filter
SU Disable, Enable Disable Yes
Appendix D D-7
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Performance Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
ARP Broadcast
Override Filter
SU Disable, Enable Disable Yes
LAN to WLAN
Bridging Mode
AU Reject Unknown, Forward
Unknown
Forward Unknown Yes
Bridge Aging Time AU, SU 100 – 2000 seconds AU, SU-BD,
SU-BD1V: 300
All other SUs:
1800
No
Broadcast Relaying AU Disable, Enable Enable No
Unicast Relaying AU Disable, Enable Enable No
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
RTS Threshold AU, SU 20 – 1600 bytes AU: 1600
SU: 60
No
Number of
Retransmissions
AU, SU 1 – 100 1 No
Number of
Retransmissions to
Decrease Rate
AU, SU 0 – 10 0 No
Number of Dwells
to Retransmit
AU, SU 0 – 9 2 No
Minimum
Contention Window
AU, SU 7 - 255 31 No
Carrier Sense Level AU, SU AU-A/E, SU-A/E: in dBm
SU-R, SU-I, AU-I : in RSSI
units
AU-A/E, SU-A/E:
-85dBm
SU-R, SU-I,
AU-I : 50 (RSSI)
No
Maximum Multicast
Rate
AU 1, 2, 3Mbps 1Mbps Yes
Multi-Rate Support AU, SU Disable, Enable Enable No
Multi-Rate Decision
Window Size
AU, SU 1 – 50 12 No
Number of Failures
in Multi-Rate
Decision Window
AU, SU 1 to Multi-Rate Decision
window Size
8No
Dwell Time AU and GU 32, 64, 128 128 No
D-8 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Service Parameters
Security Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
User Filtering
Option
SU Disable,
IP Only,
User Defined Addresses Only,
PPPoE Protocol Only
Disable Yes
Set User Filter
Address
SU IP address (8 entries) 0.0.0.0 (all 8
entries)
Yes
Set User Filter Mask SU IP address (8 entries) 255.255.255.255
(all 8 entries)
Yes
Set User Filter
Range
SU 0 - 255 0 (all 8 entries) Yes
MIR/CIR Option AU, SU Disable, Enable Disable No
MIR: AU to SU SU 32 – 2200Kbps 128Kbps No
MIR: SU to AU SU 32 – 2200Kbps 128Kbps No
CIR: AU to SU SU 0 – 2200Kbps 64Kbps No
CIR: SU to AU SU 0 – 2200Kbps 64Kbps No
Maximum Burst
Duration
AU, SU 0 – 2000 milliseconds 5 milliseconds No
Maximum Delay SU 300 – 10,000 milliseconds 5,000 milliseconds No
Graceful
Degradation Limit
AU 0 – 70 (%) 70 (%) No
MIR Only Option AU Disable, Enable Disable Yes
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Authentication
Algorithm
AU, SU Open System, Shared Key Open System No
Default Key ID AU, SU 1 – 4 1 Yes
WEP Key # 1-4 AU, SU 10 Hexadecimal Digits 0000000000 (no
key)
No
Appendix D D-9
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Voice Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Volume SU with
voice
-20 to 0 (dB) -3dB Yes
Echo Cancellation SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Enable Yes
Voice Codec SU with
voice
1 – 7654321 (use only the
digits 1 – 7)
2134 No
G723 Frames Per
Packet
SU with
voice
1 – 8 2 No
G729 Frames Per
Packet
SU with
voice
1 – 12 6 No
G711 u-Law Frames
Per Packet
SU with
voice
1 – 16 12 No
G729 Frames Per
Packet
SU with
voice
1 – 16 12 No
Voice Activity
Detection
SU with
voice
Voice Activity Detection OFF,
Voice Activity Detection G7231
Voice Activity
Detection OFF
No
D-10 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Dialing Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Pulse Dialing SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Enable No
Gatekeeper Option SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Disable No
Gatekeeper /
Gateway IP Address
SU with
voice
IP address 0.0.0.0 No
Alternate
Gatekeeper Option
SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Disable No
Alternate
Gatekeeper IP
Address
SU with
voice
IP address 0.0.0.0 No
Telephone Number SU with
voice
Up to 10 decimal digits 0000000000 No
H323 Terminal ID SU with
voice
Up to 24 characters X (No terminal ID) No
IP Dialing Option SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Enable Yes
IP Dialing Indicator SU with
voice
up to 3 phone key-pad digits
(0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)
*Yes
Automatic Prefix SU with
voice
up to 8 phone key-pad digits
(0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D)
X (No prefix) Yes
Fast Start SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Enable Yes
Information
Transfer Capability
SU with
voice
Speech,
Unrestricted,
Restricted,
3.1KHz audio,
Unrestricted with tones,
Video
Speech No
Dialing Prefix
Option
SU with
voice
Disable, Enable, Enable & Block
Inter-Regional Prefix
Disable Yes
Inter-Regional
Prefix
SU with
voice
One phone key-pad digit (0-9, *,
#, A, B, C, D) and X (no prefix).
0Yes
International Prefix SU with
voice
One phone key-pad digit (0-9, *,
#, A, B, C, D) and X (no prefix).
0Yes
Registration TTL SU with
voice
0 (not active), 1 – 65535 0 No
DTMF Relay SU with
voice
Disable, Enable, Enable
Proprietary
Enable No
Appendix D D-11
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Endpoint Type SU with
voice
Terminal, Gateway Terminal No
Fax Relay Option SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Disable No
Fax Relay
redundancy
SU with
voice
0–5 3 No
Batter Polarity SU with
voice
(Voice card
rev. D and
higher)
Forward Battery,
Reverse Battery,
Forward->Reverse Battery,
Reverse->Forward Battery
Forward Battery No
Caller ID SU with
voice
(Voice card
rev. D and
higher)
Disable,
ETSI 300659-1 DT-AS,
ETSI 300659-1 RP-AS,
ETSI 300659-1 Ringing,
Bellcore 202 MDMF,
B e l l c o re 20 2 S DM F
Disable Yes
Stop dialing
Timeout
SU with
voice
3 – 60 seconds 5 seconds Yes
Stop Dialing
Indicator
SU with
voice
Disable, Enable Disable Yes
D-12 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Telephony Signals
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Telephony Country
Standard
SU with
voice
Proprietary, Germany, Sweden,
France, United Kingdom,
Belgium, USA, Chile
USA No
Frequency 1 SU with
voice
0 – 3000Hz Dial Tone: 350
Ring Back: 440
Busy: 480
Congestion: 480
Error: 480
High Level Error:
20
No
Frequency 1 SU with
voice
0 – 3000Hz Dial Tone: 350
Ring Back: 440
Busy: 480
Congestion: 480
Error: 480
High Level Error:
0
Ring Frequency:
20
No
Level 1 SU with
voice
-32 to +3 (dBm) Dial Tone: -13
Ring Back: -19
Busy: -14
Congestion: -24
Error: -24
High Level Error:
0
Ring Frequency:
Null
No
Level 2 SU with
voice
-32 to +3 (dBm) Dial Tone: -13
Ring Back: -19
Busy: -14
Congestion: -24
Error: -24
High Level Error:
0
Ring Frequency:
Null
No
Cadence On SU with
voice
100-10,000 milliseconds Dial Tone:
Ring Back: 1000
Busy: 500
Congestion: 1000
Error: 200
High Level Error:
0
Ring Frequency:
1000
Appendix D D-13
BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Cadence Off SU with
voice
100-10,000 milliseconds Dial Tone:
Ring Back: 3000
Busy: 500
Congestion: 1000
Error: 200
High Level Error:
0
Ring Frequency:
3000
No
Duration SU with
voice
0 – 10,000 seconds Dial Tone: 15
Ring Back: 60
Busy: 15
Congestion: 0
Error: 0
High Level Error:
0
Ring Frequency:
60
No
Min. Flash Detect
Timeout
SU with
voice
0-2,000 milliseconds 120 No
Max. Flash Detect
Timeout
SU with
voice
0-2,000 milliseconds 1000 No
Disconnect Timeout SU with
voice
0-2,000 milliseconds 1000 No
Inter-Digit Timeout SU with
voice
0-2,000 milliseconds 100 No
Called Party Release
Timeout
SU with
voice
0-10,000 milliseconds 0 No
D-14 BreezeACCESS 4.0 System Manual
Manual Revision: 1.01
Hopping Parameters
Parameter Unit Range Default Run-Time
Updated
Number of Hopping
Frequencies
GU 2-99 No
Synchronization
Signal Source
GU GPS Antenna or Internal,
Local (from other GU)
GPS Antenna or
Internal
Yes
ACSE Option AU and GU Disable, Enable Disable No
Dwell Time AU and GU 32, 64, 128 128 No
Alarm Parameters
Alarm In Names GU Up to 31 printable ASCII
characters
Alarm In 1 through
Alarm In 4
Yes
Alarm Out Names GU Up to 31 printable ASCII
characters
Alarm Out 1
through Alarm Out
3
Yes
Automatic Alarm
Out Definition
GU 1 -10, N (None), A (Any) N (None) for all 3
Alarm Outs
Yes
Alarm Out Control GU On, Off, Automatic Automatic – for all
3 Alarm Outs
Yes
Index
A
Access Link Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-46
Access to DHCP Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-22
Access to Network Management Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-41
Access Units
AU-A/E-NI ...................................................................................Book 1, 2-7
Acknowledge Delay Limit Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-38
ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data Parameter ...................Book 4, 2-40
ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice Parameter .................Book 4, 2-41
ACSE Option .....................................................................................Book 4, 2-78
ACSE Option Parameter ....................................................................Book 4, 2-40
ACSE Parameters Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-40
Add Forwarding VLAN ID Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-49
Add Frequencies Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-25
Add Relaying VLAN ID Parameter ...................................................Book 4, 2-49
Advanced Configuration Menu ..........................................................Book 4, 2-21
Air Interface Parameters Menu ..........................................................Book 4, 2-22
AL In and AL OUT Connectors ........................................................Book 3, 3-2
Alarm Parameters Menu ....................................................................Book 4, 2-78
Alarms In Names And Status Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-80
Alarms In Names Menu .....................................................................Book 4, 2-79
Alarms Out Control Menu .................................................................Book 4, 2-80
Alarms Out Names Menu ..................................................................Book 4, 2-79
Alarms Out Names, Definitions, Control and Status Parameter ........Book 4, 2-81
Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-65
Alternate Gatekeeper Option Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-65
Antenna
Connection ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-11
ARP Broadcast Override Filter Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-54
AU MAC Address Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-4
AU-A/E-BS
Packing List ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
AU-A/E-NI .........................................................................................Book 1, 2-7
Packing List ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-3
AU-NI
Installation ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-12
Authentication Algorithm Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-62
Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu ...........................................Book 4, 2-79
Automatic Prefix Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-66
B
Bad fragments received Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-14
Base Station Equipment .....................................................................Book 1, 2-4
Basic Configuration Menu ................................................................. Book 4, 2-10
Basic Parameters
Configuring ..................................................................................Book 3, 1-5
Battery Polarity Parameter ................................................................. Book 4, 2-69
Best AU Parameters in SU Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-35
Best AU Selection Parameters ...........................................................Book 4, 2-34
Best AU Support Parameter .............................................................. Book 4, 2-35
BreezeACCESS
Introduction .................................................................................Book 1, 1-2
BreezeCONFIG .................................................................................Book 1, 2-10
BreezeMANAGE ...............................................................................Book 1, 2-9
Bridge Aging Time Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-54
Bridge Parameters ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-43
Bridge Parameters Menu ...................................................................Book 4, 2-43
Broadcast Relaying Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-54
BS-AU
Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-17
BS-PS
Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-14
Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
BS-PS-AC
Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-15
Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-3
BS-SH
Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-14
Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
BS-SH-AC
Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
Busy Tone Parameter .........................................................................Book 4, 2-71
C
Cadence Off .......................................................................................Book 4, 2-73
Cadence Off Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Cadence On ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Cadence On Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Call Aging Time Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-38
Called Party Release Timeout Parameter ..........................................Book 4, 2-73
Carrier Sense Level Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-56
Change Password Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-7
Change Unit Name Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-7
CIR - AU to SU Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-60
CIR - SU to AU Parameter ................................................................ Book 4, 2-60
Commissioning
AL IN and AL OUT Connectors .................................................Book 3, 3-2
Aligning SU-A/E Antenna ...........................................................Book 3, 2-3
Configuring Basic Parameters .....................................................Book 3, 1-5
GU-A-BS .....................................................................................Book 3, 1-10
RSSI and Maximum Data Rate ....................................................Book 3, 2-2
Compression Efficiency Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-63
Configuring
Basic Parameters ..........................................................................Book 3, 1-5
GU-A-BS units .............................................................................Book 3, 1-10
RSSI and Maximum Data Rate ....................................................Book 3, 2-2
Congestion Tone Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-71
Connectors
AL IN and AL OUT .....................................................................Book 3, 3-2
Console Speed Parameter ...................................................................Book 4, 2-4,
Book 4, 2-8
Continuous Link Quality Display ......................................................Book 4, 2-17
Counters
Ethernet ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-12
Per-Rate ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-19
Wireless Link ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-13
Current Number of Associations Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-4
D
Default Gateway Address Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-21
Default Key ID Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-62
Defaults Settings Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-6
Delete a Network Management IP Address Parameter ......................Book 4, 2-42
Delete a User Filtering Entry Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-59
Delete All Network Management IP Addresses Parameter ...............Book 4, 2-42
Delete All User Filtering Entries Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-59
Destination IP Address Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-16
DHCP Broadcast Override Filter Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-53
DHCP Client Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-22
DHCP Options Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-22
Dial Tone Parameter ..........................................................................Book 4, 2-71
Dialing Parameters Menu ...................................................................Book 4, 2-64
Dialing Prefix Option Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-67
Dialing Prefix Parameter ....................................................................Book 4, 2-67
Disconnect Timeout Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-73
Display Association Info Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-18
Display Bridging & Association Info ................................................Book 4, 2-17
Display Bridging & Association Info Parameter ...............................Book 4, 2-17
Display CIR/MIR Info Parameter ......................................................Book 4, 2-19
Display Counters Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-15
Display Event Log Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-9
DTMF Relay Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-68
Duplicate frames discarded Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-15
Duration .............................................................................................Book 4, 2-73
Duration Parameter ............................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Dwell Time Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-
58, Book 4,
2-78
E
Echo Cancellation Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-63
Endpoint Type Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-69
Enhanced Mode Spanning Factor ...................................................... Book 4, 2-27
Erase Event Log Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-9
Erase Manual Sequence .....................................................................Book 4, 2-26
Error Tone Parameter ........................................................................Book 4, 2-71
ESSID Parameter ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-33
ESSID Parameters .............................................................................Book 4, 2-33
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering ..............................................................Book 4, 2-53
Ethernet Counters ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-12
Event Log Menu Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-8
Event Log Policy Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-9
F
Fast Start Parameter ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-66
Fax Relay Option Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-69
Fax Relay Parameter ..........................................................................Book 4, 2-69
Fax Relay Redundancy Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-69
Filter Options Parameter ....................................................................Book 4, 2-53
Flash Memory Control Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-8
Flash Type Parameter ........................................................................ Book 4, 2-3
Flash Versions Parameter .................................................................. Book 4, 2-3
Flexible Hopping Definition Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-24
Frames dropped (too many retries) Parameter ..................................Book 4, 2-13
Frequency 1 Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Frequency 2 Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-72
G
G711A-law Frames Per Packet Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-64
G711u-law Frames Per Packet Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-64
G723 Frames Per Packet Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-64
G729 Frames Per Packet Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-64
Gatekeeper Option Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-65
GateKeeper/GateWay IP Address Parameter ....................................Book 4, 2-65
GPS and Alarms System
Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-20
GPS and Alarms system ....................................................................Book 1, 2-5
Graceful Degradation Limit Parameter ............................................. Book 4, 2-61
GU-A-BS ...........................................................................................Book 1, 2-5
Configuring ..................................................................................Book 3, 1-10
Installation ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-20
Packing List .................................................................................Book 2, 1-3
GU-BS
AL IN and AL OUT Connectors .................................................Book 3, 3-2
H
H323 Terminal ID Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-65
High Level Error Tone Parameter ......................................................Book 4, 2-72
Hopping Parameters Menu .................................................................Book 4, 2-77
Hopping Shift .....................................................................................Book 4, 2-28
Hopping Sync .....................................................................................Book 4, 2-33
Hybrid Link Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-48
I
Info Screens Menu .............................................................................Book 4, 2-3
Information Transfer Capability Parameter .......................................Book 4, 2-66
Installation
Connecting the Antenna Cable ....................................................Book 2, 1-11
GU-A-BS GPS and Alarms System .............................................Book 2, 1-20
Indoor Units .................................................................................Book 2, 1-12
Modular Base Station Equipment ................................................Book 2, 1-14
Outdoor Units ...............................................................................Book 2, 1-7
Pole Mounting Outdoor Units ......................................................Book 2, 1-9
SU-NI and AU-NI ........................................................................Book 2, 1-12
Inter-Digit Timeout Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-73
Internally discarded MIR/CIR Parameter ..........................................Book 4, 2-15
International Prefix Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-68
Inter-Regional Prefix Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-67
Introducing BreezeACCESS ..............................................................Book 1, 1-2
IP Address Parameter .........................................................................Book 4, 2-21
IP Dialing Indicator Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-66
IP Dialing Option Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-66
IP Parameters Menu ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-21
L
LAN to Wireless Link Bridging Mode Parameter .............................Book 4, 2-54
Level 1 Parameter ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Level 2 Parameter ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Locating Units
AU-RA .........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5
AU-RE .........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5
IF Cable ........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5
Indoor Equipment ........................................................................Book 2, 1-6
SU-RA ..........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5
SU-RE ..........................................................................................Book 2, 1-5
Log Out Timer Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-8
M
MAC Address Database .....................................................................Book 4, 2-17
Main Menu .........................................................................................Book 4, 2-2
Management Systems ........................................................................Book 1, 2-9
BreezeCONFIG ............................................................................Book 1, 2-10
BreezeMANAGE .........................................................................Book 1, 2-9
Manual Sequence Definition .............................................................Book 4, 2-26
Max. Flash Detect Timeout Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-73
Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions Parameter .....................................Book 4, 2-40
Maximum Burst Duration Parameter ................................................ Book 4, 2-60
Maximum Data Rate
Configuring ..................................................................................Book 3, 2-2
Maximum Data Rate Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-36
Maximum Delay Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-61
Maximum Multicast Rate Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-56
Maximum Number of Associations Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-38
Maximum Voice Sessions Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-39
Menus
Advanced Configuration ..............................................................Book 4, 2-21
Air Interface Parameters .............................................................. Book 4, 2-22
Alarm Parameters ........................................................................ Book 4, 2-78
Alarms In Names .........................................................................Book 4, 2-79
Alarms Out Control .....................................................................Book 4, 2-80
Alarms Out Names ......................................................................Book 4, 2-79
Automatic Alarms Out Definition ............................................... Book 4, 2-79
Basic Configuration .....................................................................Book 4, 2-10
Bridge Parameters ........................................................................Book 4, 2-43
Dialing Parameters ......................................................................Book 4, 2-64
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering ........................................................Book 4, 2-53
Hopping Parameters ....................................................................Book 4, 2-77
Info Screens .................................................................................Book 4, 2-3
IP Parameters ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-21
Main ............................................................................................. Book 4, 2-2
Network Management Parameters ...............................................Book 4, 2-41
Performance Parameters ..............................................................Book 4, 2-55
Security Parameters .....................................................................Book 4, 2-62
Service Parameters ......................................................................Book 4, 2-58
Show Advanced Parameters ........................................................ Book 4, 2-5
Show Alarm Parameters ..............................................................Book 4, 2-80
Show All Parameters ...................................................................Book 4, 2-5
Show Basic Parameters ............................................................... Book 4, 2-5
Show Unit Status .........................................................................Book 4, 2-3
Site Survey ...................................................................................Book 4, 2-12
Telephony Signals .......................................................................Book 4, 2-71
Unit Control .................................................................................Book 4, 2-6
Voice Parameters .........................................................................Book 4, 2-63
Micro-Cell Access Unit .....................................................................Book 1, 2-7
Min. Flash Detect Timeout Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-73
Minimum Contention Window Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-56
MIR - AU to SU Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-60
MIR - SU to AU Parameter ............................................................... Book 4, 2-60
MIR and CIR Parameters ..................................................................Book 4, 2-
59, Book 4,
2-70
MIR/CIR Option Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-60
Multi-Rate Decision Window Size Parameter ...................................Book 4, 2-57
Multi-Rate Support Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-57
N
Network Management Filtering Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-41
Network Management Parameters .....................................................Book 4, 2-41
Network Management Parameters Menu ...........................................Book 4, 2-41
Networking Equipment ......................................................................Book 1, 2-8
No. of Pings Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-16
Number of Associations Since Last Reset Parameter ........................Book 4, 2-4
Number of Dwells to Retransmit Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-55
Number of Failures in Multi-Rate Decision Window Parameter ......Book 4, 2-57
Number of Hopping Frequencies Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-77
Number of Retransmissions Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-55
Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate Parameter ..................Book 4, 2-56
Number of Scanning Attempts Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-35
O
Operator ESSID Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-33
Outdoor Units
Bottom Panel ................................................................................Book 2, 1-7
Installation ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-7
Pole Mounting ..............................................................................Book 2, 1-9
P
Packing Lists
AU-A/E-BS ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
AU-A/E-NI ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-3
BS-PS ...........................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
BS-PS-AC ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-3
BS-SH ..........................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
BS-SH-AC ...................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
GU-A-BS .....................................................................................Book 2, 1-3
SU-A/E .........................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
Per Hop Statistics ...............................................................................Book 4, 2-15
Performance Parameters ....................................................................Book 4, 2-55
Performance Parameters Menu ..........................................................Book 4, 2-55
Per-Rate Counters ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-
19, Book 4,
2-20
Physical Specifications ......................................................................Book 1, 3-6
Ping Frame Length Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-16
Ping Frame Timeout Parameter .........................................................Book 4, 2-16
Ping Test ............................................................................................Book 4, 2-16
PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter Parameter .....................................Book 4, 2-53
Preferred AU MAC Address Parameter .............................................Book 4, 2-35
Pulse Dialing Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-65
R
Rate Parameter ...................................................................................Book 4, 2-57
Receive Attenuation Control Parameter ............................................ Book 4, 2-39
Registration TTL Parameter ..............................................................Book 4, 2-68
Remove Forwarding VLAN ID Parameter ........................................Book 4, 2-49
Remove Frequencies Parameter ........................................................Book 4, 2-25
Remove Relaying VLAN ID Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-50
Reset Counters Parameter .................................................................. Book 4, 2-15
Reset Unit Parameter .........................................................................Book 4, 2-6
Ring Frequency Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-72
Ring-Back Tone Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-71
Ringer Frequency Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-72
RSSI
Configuring ..................................................................................Book 3, 2-2
RSSI Display Option .........................................................................Book 4, 2-20
RTS Threshold Parameter .................................................................Book 4, 2-55
S
Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults Parameter ..........Book 4, 2-7
Scrambling Definition .......................................................................Book 4, 2-25
Scrambling Mode ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-25
Security Parameters ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-62
Security Parameters Menu .................................................................Book 4, 2-62
Send SNMP Traps Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-43
Service Parameters ............................................................................Book 4, 2-58
Service Parameters Menu ..................................................................Book 4, 2-58
Set Factory Defaults Parameter .........................................................Book 4, 2-6
Set Full Operator Defaults Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-6
Set Network Management IP Addresses Parameter ..........................Book 4, 2-42
Set Partial Factory Defaults Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-6
Set Partial Operator Defaults Parameter ............................................ Book 4, 2-7
Set User Filter Address Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-58
Set User Filter Mask Parameter .........................................................Book 4, 2-58
Set User Filter Range Parameter .......................................................Book 4, 2-59
Show Advanced Parameters Menu ....................................................Book 4, 2-5
Show Alarm Parameters Menu .......................................................... Book 4, 2-80
Show All Parameters Menu ...............................................................Book 4, 2-5
Show All User Filtering Parameters Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-59
Show Basic Parameters Menu ...........................................................Book 4, 2-5
Show IP Parameters Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-22
Show Ping Test Values Parameter .....................................................Book 4, 2-17
Show Unit Status Menu .....................................................................Book 4, 2-3
Site Survey Menu ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-12
SNMP Traps Community Parameter .................................................Book 4, 2-43
SNMP Traps IP Destination Parameter .............................................Book 4, 2-43
SNMP Traps Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-42
Spanning Factor .................................................................................Book 4, 2-27
Specifications
AU-A/E-NI ...................................................................................Book 1, 3-7
Configuration and Managemen ....................................................Book 1, 3-4
Data Communication ...................................................................Book 1, 3-3
Environmental ..............................................................................Book 1, 3-5
GU-RA GPS Radio ......................................................................Book 1, 3-4
GU-RA to BS-GU Communication .............................................Book 1, 3-5
IF Indoor Outdoor Communication ............................................Book 1, 3-4
Modular Base Station Equipmen .................................................Book 1, 3-8
Physical ........................................................................................Book 1, 3-6
Radio and Modem ........................................................................Book 1, 3-2
Standards Compliance, General ...................................................Book 1, 3-5
SU-A/E .........................................................................................Book 1, 3-6
Telephony .....................................................................................Book 1, 3-3
Voice/Fax .....................................................................................Book 1, 3-3
Start Sending Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-17
Statistics
Per Hop ........................................................................................Book 4, 2-15
Traffic ...........................................................................................Book 4, 2-12
Voice ............................................................................................Book 4, 2-15
Stop Sending Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-17
SU-A/E ...............................................................................................Book 1, 2-2
Aligning Antenna .........................................................................Book 3, 2-3
Packing List ..................................................................................Book 2, 1-2
Subnet Mask Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-21
Subscriber Units .................................................................................Book 1, 2-2
SU-A/E .........................................................................................Book 1, 2-2
SU-NI
Installation ....................................................................................Book 2, 1-12
SUs .....................................................................................................Book 1, 2-2
Synchronization Signal Source Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-78
System Specifications ........................................................................Book 1, 3-2
T
Telephone Number Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-65
Telephony Country Standard Parameter ............................................Book 4, 2-71
Telephony Signals Menu ...................................................................Book 4, 2-71
Test
Ping ..............................................................................................Book 4, 2-16
Timeouts Parameter ...........................................................................Book 4, 2-73
ToS Precedence Threshold Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-52
ToS Priority Parameter .......................................................................Book 4, 2-52
ToS Priority Parameters .....................................................................Book 4, 2-52
Total received data frames Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-14
Total received frames from wireless Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-14
Total received frames via Ethernet Parameter ...................................Book 4, 2-12
Total retransmitted frames Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-14
Total submitted frames (bridge) Parameter .......................................Book 4, 2-13
Total transmitted frames to wireless Parameter .................................Book 4, 2-13
Total Tx errors Parameter ..................................................................Book 4, 2-14
Traffic Statistics .................................................................................Book 4, 2-12
Transmit Power Control Parameter ................................................... Book 4, 2-36
Transmitted wireless to Ethernet Parameter ......................................Book 4, 2-12
Trunk Link Parameter ........................................................................Book 4, 2-47
U
Unicast Relaying Parameter .............................................................. Book 4, 2-55
Unit Control Menu .............................................................................Book 4, 2-6
Unit Hardware Version Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-3
Unit MAC Address Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-3
Unit Status - GU Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-4
Unit Status - SU Parameter ................................................................Book 4, 2-4
Unit Type Parameter ..........................................................................Book 4, 2-3
Units
Base Station Equipment ...............................................................Book 1, 2-4
Subscriber ....................................................................................Book 1, 2-2
User Filtering Option Parameter ........................................................ Book 4, 2-58
User Filtering Parameters ..................................................................Book 4, 2-58
V
VLAN ................................................................................................Book 4, 2-43
VLAN Forwarding Parameter ...........................................................Book 4, 2-48
VLAN Forwarding Support Parameter ..............................................Book 4, 2-49
VLAN ID-Data Parameter .................................................................Book 4, 2-44
VLAN ID-Management Parameter ...................................................Book 4, 2-44
VLAN ID-Voice & Management Parameter .....................................Book 4, 2-45
VLAN Link Type Parameter .............................................................Book 4, 2-46
VLAN Parameters .............................................................................Book 4, 2-43
VLAN Priority - Data Parameter .......................................................Book 4, 2-51
VLAN Priority - Management Parameter .........................................Book 4, 2-51
VLAN Priority - Voice Parameter ..................................................... Book 4, 2-51
VLAN Priority Threshold Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-51
VLAN Relaying Parameter ...............................................................Book 4, 2-49
VLAN Relaying Support Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-49
VLAN Support Parameter .................................................................Book 4, 2-43
VLAN Traffic Priority Parameter ...................................................... Book 4, 2-50
Voice Activity Detection Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-64
Voice Bytes Received Parameter ......................................................Book 4, 2-15
Voice Bytes Transmitted Parameter ..................................................Book 4, 2-15
Voice Codec Parameter .....................................................................Book 4, 2-63
Voice Frames Received Parameter ....................................................Book 4, 2-15
Voice Frames Transmitted Parameter ...............................................Book 4, 2-15
Voice Hardware Version Parameter .................................................. Book 4, 2-4
Voice Packets ToS Parameter ............................................................Book 4, 2-52
Voice Parameters Menu .....................................................................Book 4, 2-63
Voice Priority Tag Option Parameter ................................................Book 4, 2-48
Voice Statistics ..................................................................................Book 4, 2-15
Volume Parameter ..............................................................................Book 4, 2-63
W
WEP KEY # Parameter ......................................................................Book 4, 2-62
Wireless Link Counters ......................................................................Book 4, 2-13
WLAN Aging Time Parameter ..........................................................Book 4, 2-38